Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 250

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

HIGH-IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

GRB150 - D

© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017


All Rights Reserved.

( Ver. 3.1)
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRB150. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbols used


Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or


serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or


serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.

1
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

DANGER
 Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.

WARNING
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Fiber optic
When connecting this equipment via an optical fibre, do not look directly at the optical signal.

CAUTION
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION
 Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that
they conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as
this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When
disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial

2
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

waste. If any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

 Plastics material
This product contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins

3
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 8
2. Application Notes 10
2.1 High-impedance Differential Protection 10
2.1.1 Principle of operation 10
2.1.2 Through Fault Stability 10
2.1.3 Current Transformer Requirements 12
2.1.4 Fault Setting or Primary Operating Current 12
2.1.5 Peak Voltage Developed under Internal Fault Conditions 13
2.1.6 CT Supervision 13
2.2 Scheme Logic 14
2.2.1 High-impedance Differential Protection 14
2.2.2 Cold Load Protection 14
2.3 Setting 16
2.4 Tripping Output 16
3. Technical Description 17
3.1 Hardware Description 17
3.2 Input and Output Signals 22
3.2.1 Input Signals 22
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 22
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 23
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 25
3.3 Automatic Supervision 26
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 26
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 26
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 27
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 27
3.3.5 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring 28
3.3.6 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring 28
3.3.7 Failure Alarms 28
3.3.8 Trip Blocking 30
3.3.9 Setting 30
3.4 Recording Function 31
3.4.1 Fault Recording 31
3.4.2 Event Recording 32
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 32
3.5 Metering Function 33
4. User Interface 34
4.1 Outline of User Interface 34

4
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.1.1 Front Panel 34


4.1.2 Communication Ports 36
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 37
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 37
4.2.2 Relay Menu 40
4.2.3 Displaying Records 42
4.2.4 Displaying the Status Information 45
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 48
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 50
4.2.7 Testing 68
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 71
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 71
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 72
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 72
4.7 Clock Function 73
5. Installation 74
5.1 Receipt of Relays 74
5.2 Relay Mounting 74
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 74
5.4 Handling Precautions 74
5.5 External Connections 75
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 76
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 76
6.2 Cautions 77
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 77
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 77
6.3 Preparations 78
6.4 Hardware Tests 79
6.4.1 User Interfaces 79
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 80
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 80
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 81
6.5 Function Test 83
6.5.1 Measuring Element 83
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 86
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 86
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 87
6.6.1 On Load Test 87
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 87
6.7 Maintenance 88
6.7.1 Regular Testing 88
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 88

5
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.7.3 Replacing a Failed Relay Unit 89


6.7.4 Resumption of Service 90
6.7.5 Storage 90
7. Putting Relay into Service 91

6
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix A Block Diagram 93


Appendix B Signal List 95
Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List 123
Appendix D Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation Instruction 127
Appendix E Outline of GRB150 and EB-101, -102 137
Appendix F External Connection 141
Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet 145
Appendix H Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 175
Appendix I Return Repair Form 179
Appendix J Technical Data 183
Appendix K Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 189
Appendix L Setting Calculation 193
Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and Troubleshooting 197
Appendix N Timing Chart of Cold Load Condition Judgment 209
Appendix O IEC61850: MICS & PICS 211
Appendix P Ordering 243

 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver. 3.1)

7
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

1. Introduction
The GRB150 provides high-impedance differential protection scheme and is applied for the
following protections:
 Restricted earth fault protection
 Single or one-and-a-half busbar protection
 T zone protection of one-and-a-half busbar arrangement
 Short line cable protection
The high-impedance differential protection detects a fault even if the CT is saturated by fault current.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485, fibre optic port
or Ethernet LAN port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay
settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further,
data communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to
the IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 standards.
Data available either via the relay HMI or communications ports includes the following
functions.

The GRB150 provides the following metering and recording functions.


 Metering
 Fault records
 Event records
 Disturbance recording (available via communications ports)

The GRB150 has two models, model 101 and model 201. The model 101 is used for single-phase
applications and for restricted earth fault protection. The model 201 is used for three-phase
applications and for three-phase busbar, T zone and short line cable protection.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRB150 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.

8
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRB150 -


101D 201D
High-impedance differential (DIF: single-phase) 
High-impedance differential (DIF: three-phase) 
Cold Load Protection  
CT Supervision (DIFSV)  
Self supervision  
Trip circuit supervision  
CB State Monitoring  
Eight settings groups  
Metering  
Fault records  
Event records  
Disturbance records  
IEC60870-5-103 Communication  
IEC61850 communication  

9
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

2. Application Notes
2.1 High-impedance Differential Protection
2.1.1 Principle of operation

The operating principle of high-impedance differential protection is depicted in Figure 2.1.1.


Under normal operating conditions or in the event of an external fault the primary currents
entering and leaving the protected zone will summate to zero. The current transformers are
connected in parallel hence if their ratios are the same the secondary currents will also sum to
zero. According to the direction of the respective secondary current for each current transformer
their driving voltages are in opposition and hence a low voltage is generated in the differential
circuit such that under ideal conditions the voltage across the relay is zero.

Busbar Busbar

EB-101 or EB-101 or
EB102 Resistor EB102 Resistor

GRB150 GRB150

Varistor Varistor

(a) External Fault (b) Internal Fault


Figure 2.1.1 High-Impedance Differential Protection

In the case of an internal fault the current transformer secondary currents will be in the same
direction and their sum will correspond to the total primary fault current. The corresponding
driving voltages will be in the same direction and a high voltage will be developed in the
differential circuit as it attempts to drive the secondary current through the burden presented by
the high-impedance relay. Dependent upon its setting the voltage relay will operate.
Note that in Figure 2.1.1 an external unit, either type EB-101 for single-phase protection or
EB-102 for three-phase protection has been shown. These include a varistor to limit the high
voltage developed in the differential circuit during internal faults and a series resistor to fix the
relay input impedance at 667ohms. Refer to Sections, 2.1.4 “Fault Setting or Primary Operating
Current” and 2.1.5 “Peak Voltage Developed under Internal Fault Conditions”.

2.1.2 Through Fault Stability

The stability of a current differential system using a high-impedance relay and low reactance
current transformers is determined by means of calculation. If the relay setting voltage is made
equal to or greater than the maximum voltage that can appear across the relay circuit for a given
value of through fault current the current differential system will be stable. In calculating the
required setting voltage for the relay it is assumed that one current transformer will become fully
saturated and that the remaining current transformers will maintain their ratio. An example to
illustrate this point is shown in Figure 2.1.2 for a current differential system for a busbar with
several feeders.

 10 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Busbar

EB-101 or
EB102 Resistor

GRB150

Varistor

Figure 2.1.2 External Fault – Busbar with Several Feeders

In this example an external fault is fed through a single circuit with the fault current being
supplied through all of the other circuits connected to the busbar. Since the total busbar current
has to be transformed by the current transformer on the faulted feeder there is a high probability
of this current transformer saturating whilst the current transformers on the other more lightly
loaded circuits remain unsaturated. Under these conditions a secondary current will flow in the
differential circuit that is equivalent to the primary fault current. The voltage drop caused by the
secondary current that flows in the differential circuit therefore determines the voltage input at
the relay.
In the equivalent circuit the shunt impedance for the fully saturated CT is negligible and the CT
will not produce an output, this is shown as a short circuit across the excitation impedance in
Figure 2.1.3.
Busbar

RS1 RL1 RL2 RS2

GRB150 +
CT1 ZE1 ZR EB-101/ ZE2 CT2
EB-102

Figure 2.1.3 Equivalent Circuit of the Differential Circuit for an External Fault

The total voltage drop is therefore due to the secondary fault current through the secondary
winding resistance of the saturated CT together with the wiring connecting it to the relay circuit
terminals. Provided that the relay setting voltage exceeds the value of V R in Equation (1) the
scheme will remain stable.

 11 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

VR  K1 (RS2 + RL2) IFmax/N (1)


where,
VR : maximum voltage developed across the relay circuit
K1 : safety factor – for the GRB150, K1=1.2
RS : resistance of current transformer secondary winding
RL : resistance of secondary wiring for CT connecting lead loop –
most onerous case
IFmax : maximum through fault current
N : CT ratio

Factor K1 is associated with the design of the GRB150 relay and directly relates to its inherent
capability to block the unidirectional transient component of the fault current. This is based on
previous service experience and extensive laboratory tests.
In addition to K1 an inherent safety factor exists because the basic assumption of complete
saturation of one current transformer with no ratio error of the complementary one is an extreme
case of unbalance. In practice it is unlikely to occur as when one current transformer begins to
saturate its burden is transferred to the other current transformer(s) due to the fact that they are of
the same construction and experience the same secondary voltage.

2.1.3 Current Transformer Requirements

 All current transformers used in the scheme shall have the same turns ratio
 All current transformers shall be of the low reactance type class X as specified in B.S.3938 in
terms of turns ratio, knee point voltage, secondary winding resistance and secondary exciting
current
 Bushing or toroidal current transformers with fully distributed windings and low leakage flux
shall be used.
 The secondary winding resistance must be kept to a minimum
 It is preferable that the current transformers are of similar design
 Other devices must not be connected to the same CT core
 CT knee-point voltage, Vk  2×VR

For an internal fault it is essential that the current transformer(s) produce sufficient output to
operate the relay. In order to achieve this, cater for any current transformer ratio errors and
ensure a high speed of operation the current transformers should have a VK of at least twice that
of the relay setting voltage as stated above.
A setting example is provided in Appendix L.

2.1.4 Fault Setting or Primary Operating Current

During an internal fault, the fault current must provide the exciting current for all of the
connected current transformers as well as the relay circuit current. To ensure positive operation,
the current requirement of the relay and the magnetising current requirement of all of the
connected current transformers at the relay setting voltage must be less than the minimum fault

 12 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

current that the relay is required to detect. Therefore the secondary effective setting is the sum of
the relay minimum operating current and the excitation losses in all parallel connected current
transformers. The currents are not in-phase and hence the summation should be vectorial.
However, an arithmetic addition is acceptable resulting in the calculated setting being slightly
higher than the actual setting.

Imin = (n.Ie + Ir + I)N (2)


where,
Imin : minimum primary operating current
n : number of current transformers connected to the GRB150 relay
Ie : value of current transformer secondary exciting current at GRB150 setting voltage
I : relay current at setting voltage
where, I = VR /ZR and ZR is the GRB150 input impedance of 667 ohms with varistor unit
EB-101 for single-phase protection or EB-102 for three-phase protection
Ir : varistor current at GRB150 setting voltage, this is obtained from the varistor V-I
characteristic
N : CT ratio

If the value calculated for Imin is too low the sensitivity can be reduced by the use of a shunt
resistor connected across the relay/varistor unit input.
A setting example is provided in Appendix L.

2.1.5 Peak Voltage Developed under Internal Fault Conditions

Under internal fault conditions a high voltage is developed in the differential circuit by the
current transformer so a varistor, (non-linear resistor) is connected in parallel to the relay to limit
the overvoltage. A varistor unit EB-101 is provided for single-phase protection and the EB-102
unit for three-phase protection.
Note: It is our standard practice to use the EB-101 and EB-102 varistor units when applying
the GRB150. For those who prefer the more traditional approach of using externally
mounted components in place of the EB-101 and EB-102 units the GRB150 can be
applied with externally mounted suitably rated, linear and non-linear devices
provided that the input impedance is maintained at 667 ohms.

2.1.6 CT Supervision

The DIFSV element provides CT supervision to detect any unbalance in the CT secondary circuit
in the event of a fault in the wiring or the CT itself. The voltage setting of this element must be
greater than any erroneous voltage that can be developed under normal service conditions. The
two main sources of error are: -
 CT turns ratio error
 Differences in the respective lengths of the CT secondary connecting leads to the
paralleling point of the differential circuit
The setting of the DIFSV element is best illustrated with an example which is given in Appendix
L.

 13 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

2.2 Scheme Logic


2.2.1 High-impedance Differential Protection

Figure 2.2.1 shows the scheme logic for the high-impedance differential protection type
GRB150. The differential protection operates on a per phase basis, although output signals of the
high-impedance differential element DIF can perform instantaneous three-phase tripping of the
circuit breaker. The supervisory element DIFSV will detect any erroneous differential voltage
appearing as a result of CT circuit failure. The tripping output signal of the DIF elements can be
blocked when the DIFSV element output is maintained for the setting time of TVDSV. To block
the tripping output with DIFSV operation, set scheme switch VDCHK to “ON” and set
SVCNT to “ALM&BLK”.
The output signal VD ERR of DIFSV element is used for alarm purposes.
The DIF and DIFSV can be disabled by the PLC signals DIF_BLOCK and DIFSV_BLOCK
respectively.
Model 101 447
1 DIF-OR
DIF
1 11 21
A & DIF TRIP-A
12 22
DIF B & DIF TRIP-B
13 23
C & DIF TRIP-C
Model 201 1536 DIF_BLOCK 1 28
SVCNT 1 DIF
COLD LOAD  & TRIP
1
from Figure 2.2.2. "ALM&BLK"

Model 101 448


DIFSV 1 DIFSV-OR
14 TVDSV 27
1 24
A & t 0 VD ERR
1
15
DIFSV B 25
& t 0
16 26
C t 0
&
Model 201
0.10 - 60.00s
A.M.F ON
VDCHK

"ON"
1537 DIFSV_BLOCK 1

Figure 2.2.1 Scheme Logic of High-impedance Differential Protection

2.2.2 Cold Load Protection

Cold load protection provides the following functions:


 Cold load status judgment
 DIF characteristic modification during cold load status

2.2.2.1 Cold-load status judgment


Figure 2.2.2 shows the cold load status judgment logic.

 14 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Function 1 TCLP 10
1538 CB_FOR_CLP &
COLD LOAD
≧1 &
0.01–100.00s
By PLC Function 2
TCLE TCLR
769
1 t 0 0 t
BI2 COMMAND & Off 1
F1 0.00–100.00s 0.00–100.00s
CL
[CLEN] F2 [CLPTST] N-CL
Off
1

Figure 2.2.2 Cold Load Status Judgment Logic

Two separate operational functions are available and they depend on the status of the PLC signal
CB_FOR_CLP. (Refer to Appendix N.)
- Function 1: used when ‘CB closing command’ is allocated to the PLC signal
CB_FOR_CLP”.
- Function 2: used when ‘CB contact’ is allocated to the PLC signal CB_FOR_CLP.
These functions are selected by the scheme switch [CLEN].
When using the ’CB close command’ function, set [CLEN] to “F1”.
When using the ’CB contact’, set [CLEN] to “F2”.
If the cold load protection is disabled, set [CLEN] to “OFF”.
The [CLPTST] switch is used for testing purposes – please refer to Section 4.2.7.1.
The timing chart of cold load status judgment is shown in Appendix N.

2.2.2.2 DIF characteristic modification during cold load status


If cold load status has been determined, then the operation sensitivity of DIF is modified from
([DIF] setting value) to ([DIF] setting  [DIFCC] setting value).

 15 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

2.3 Setting
The following list shows the setting elements for the high-impedance differential protection and
their setting ranges.
Element Range Step Default
[VDCHK] Off / On - On
[CLEN] Off / F1 / F2 - Off
[SVCNT] ALM&BLK / ALM - ALM&BLK
DIF 10 - 600V 1V 100 V
DIFSV 5 - 100V 1V 50 V
TVDSV 0.10 - 60.00s 0.01s 0.50 s
DIFCC 1.00 – 10.00 0.01 1.00
TCLP 0.01 – 100.00s 0.01s 0.01 s
TCLE 0.00 – 100.00s 0.01s 0.00 s
TCLR 0.00 – 100.00s 0.01s 0.00 s

2.4 Tripping Output


GRB150 provides 6 auxiliary relays and 4 high-speed auxiliary relays for alarm and trip as
described in Section 3.2.7. These auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection or alarm
outputs by setting.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be programmed by PLC function. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the` status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit
breaker tripping coil current.

 16 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
Case outlines of GRB150, EB-101 and EB-102 are shown in Appendix E.
The hardware structure of GRB150 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.
The GRB150 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed to
the front panel and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is
provided with the front panel.
 Power module (POWD)
 Signal processing module (SPMD)
 Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRB150 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.

SPMD

POWD

HMI
IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM

RESET

A B 0V
CAN
CEL ENTER
Handle for relay END
withdrawal

Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case

 17 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

ETH
POWD SPMD
DC Ethernet LAN I/F
DC/DC 1 Remote PC
supply
Converter

Binary Photo-coupler RS485 or


input V 8 Remote PC
Optical fibre
port  1

AC input Binary output


CT  1 Analogue Multi- A/D Auxiliary relay
MPU (Trip
or 3 filter plexer converter  11 command etc.)

IRIG-B port External


RAM ROM clock

Human machine
Interface (HMI)

Liquid crystal display


16 characters  2 lines

LEDs Operation keys

Local
personal RS232C Monitoring
computer I/F jacks

Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram

POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates 1 or 2 auxiliary CTs depending on the relay model, DC/DC converter
and 8 photo-coupler circuits for binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 48V, 110V/125V or 220/250V.
The normal range of input voltage is 20% to 20%.

SPMD Module
The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies
of 2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).

 18 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

The SPMD module also incorporates 7 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO6 and FAIL) and 4 high-speed
auxiliary relays (HBO1- HBO4) for binary output signals. BO1 to BO6 and HBO1 to HBO4 are
user configurable output signals and have one normally open contact.
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one normally closed contacts, and operates
when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is detected.
RS485, fibre optic and/or Ethernet LAN serial ports are provided for communication to a remote
PC, and IRIG-B port also can be provided for external clock. Ethernet LAN ports are mounted on
ETH sub-module.

Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module


The operator can access the GRB150 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 9 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow
(LED2) Yellow
(LED3) Yellow
(LED4) Yellow
(LED5) Yellow
(LED6) Yellow

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses
of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section
4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user,
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element
such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the

 19 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

settings or change the settings.


The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the
signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see
Appendix C.)
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Screw for cover

Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
RESET

Operation keys

Ligh
emitting diodes A B 0V CAN
(LED)Jacks
Monitoring CEL ENTER

RS232C connector END

To a local PC
Screw for handle Screw for cover

Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel

 20 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

EB-101 and EB-102


Varistor unit EB101 or 102 is connected in parallel to the GRB150 to prevent an overvoltage
generated at the differential circuit during a fault. Figure 3.1.4 shows an internal circuit of the
varistor unit.
The EB-101 is coupled with the GRB150 model 101 for single-phase protection, and the EB-102
is coupled with the GRB150 model 201 for three-phase protection.

2 k
TB1-1 2 k TB1-4

2 k
11
TB1-2 Varistor TB1-5

TB1-8
Earth

(a) EB-101

2 k
TB1-1 2 k TB2-1
2 k
11 A phase

TB1-2 Varistor TB2-2

2 k
TB1-3 2 k TB2-3

2 k
B phase
11
TB1-4 Varistor TB2-4

2 k

TB1-5 2 k TB2-5
2 k
11 C phase

TB1-6 Varistor TB2-6

TB1-8 Earth

(b) EB-102

Figure 3.1.4 Internal Circuit of Varistor Unit

 21 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.2 Input and Output Signals


3.2.1 Input Signals

AC input signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for each of the GRB150 models and their
respective input terminal numbers.

Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Terminal No. of TB1 GRB150-101 GRB150-201


1-2 Current A phase current
3-4 - B phase current
5-6 - C phase current

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRB150 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.
The binary input circuit of the GRB150 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a
binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows
the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving
contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then
“Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to
300.00s respectively.
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS - BI8SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BI1PUD - BI8PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD - BI8DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and
138V DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating
and 125V DC at 220/250V DC.

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between eight settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2647).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within
16 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by
setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on
the LCD. These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.

 22 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

(+) () BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]


BI1 1284 t 0 0 t 768
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 1285 t 0 0 t 769
BI2
"Norm"
1
"Inv"

BI8PUD BI8DOD [BI8SNS]


BI8 1291 t 0 0 t 775
BI8
"Norm"
1
"Inv"

0V

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix F. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRB150 provides 4 high-speed auxiliary relays HBO1 to HBO4 and provides 6 auxiliary relays
which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail output and seven programmable
auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6. HBO1 to HBO4 and BO1 to BO6 can be programmed.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The
setting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the 11 output relays above
individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit
or OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured
according to the setting menu. Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Inst”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Latch” by
the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can
be set by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous
for the input signal time.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply
circuit is detected.

 23 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Signal List

& Auxiliary relay


6 GATES
Appendix B
or 1

1
6 GATES

&

TBO
0 t
&
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl"
& S
F/F
"Lat"
R

Reset button
+

By PLC 1
768
BI1_COMMAND 1639 IND.RESET

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element Range Step Default Remarks
[RESET] Inst / Dl / Dw / Lat See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C

 24 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

GRB150 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logic on binary
signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation trigger of fault records and disturbance records are
programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or
for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to the PLC
tool instruction manual.

Figure 3.2.4 Sample Screen for PLC Tool

 25 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.3 Automatic Supervision


3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting
for a power system fault to occur at any time and must operate without fail when it occurs.
Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system
during normal operation, plays an important role. A numerical relay based on the microprocessor
operations is suitable for implementing this automatic supervision function of the protection
system. The GRB150 implements the automatic supervision function taking advantage of this
feature based on the following concept:
 The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a relay failure occurs, it should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring


The relay is supervised with the following items.

Differential voltage monitoring


The supervisory element DIFSV is provided to check the health of CT circuits. The DIFSV
element detects the erroneous differential voltage that appears under a CT circuit failure.

A/D accuracy checking


An analogue reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analogue-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range and
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Memory monitoring
The memories are monitored as follows depending on the type of memory, and checked that the
memory circuits are healthy:
 Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
 Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
 Setting value monitoring: Checks the discrepancy between the setting values stored in
duplicate.

Watchdog timer
A hardware timer which is cleared periodically by software is provided and it is checked that the
software is running normally.

DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and checks that the DC
voltage is within a prescribed range.

 26 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1632:TC_FAIL signal by PLC.
When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip
circuit. Then logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets
and the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the BIn output is "0".
If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in
LCD message.
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON".
When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is closed.
(+) Trip circuit supervision

BIn
Trip t 0 1270
1632 TC_FAIL 1 & TCSV
output
0.4s
CB CLOSE
& 1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
+ "ON"
CB trip coil

Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic

3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring


Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If
two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’,
then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are
in opposite states. Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five
seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD
message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
t 0 1271
1633 CB_N/O_CONT =1 1 CBSV
&
5.0s

1634 CB_N/C_CONT

[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.2 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to “CB_N/O_CONT” and
“CB_N/C_CONT” by PLC.

 27 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring


Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit and the operation
mechanism. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of fault current
interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of CB:
 Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT. The default setting is the
TP_COUNT is assigned to the DIF_TRIP signal.

3.3.5 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring

If there is a failure in PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be prevented.
Therefore, PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and the respective alarms "PLC
stop" and "MAP stop" are issued if a failure is detected.

3.3.6 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring

The sending and receiving functions on the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The
receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending
function is executed by checking a “Ping” response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an
alarm of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.
These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].

3.3.7 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message,
“ALARM” LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarises the
supervision items and alarms.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.


The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] (Automatic
Monitoring Function) to OFF. The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during
commissioning, testing or maintenance.
When the watchdog timer detects that the software is not running normally, the LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.

 28 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item [SVCNT] LCD Message LED LED Ext. Event record Message
switch* "IN SERVICE" "ALARM" alarm
Differential ALM & BLK Off On
voltage monitoring (1) (2) Vd err
ALM On On
A/D accuracy check
(1) Off On (3) Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (3) ----
DC supply monitoring ---- Off (4) (3) ----
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
Trip count alarm ALM:TP COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
PLC data or IEC61850 mapping Err: PLC, Err: MAP On On (4) Relay fail-A
data monitoring
GOOSE message check Err: GOOSE On On (4) Relay fail-A
Ping response check Err: Ping On On (4) Relay fail-A

*: For [SVCNT] (supervision control) switch, see Appendix G and for its scheme logic, see
Appendix A.
(1) Diverse messages are provided as expressed with " Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2) The configurable signal “VD ERR” operates. (See Appendix B.)
(3) The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
(4) Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.

 29 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.3.8 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for as
long as the failure exists and is restored when the failure is removed.
 Differential voltage monitoring (selectable)
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
 DC supply monitoring
When a failure is detected by the differential voltage monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is initiated, or, if only an
alarm is initiated. (For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.7)

3.3.9 Setting

The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and their setting range are shown in
the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks


[SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and/or blocking selection

 30 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.4 Recording Function


The GRB150 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRB150 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Relevant events
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input
signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the latest fault one is then stored.

Date and time of fault occurrence


The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.
To be precise, this is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated, and thus it is
approximately 10ms after the occurrence of the fault.

Operating phase (for Model 201)


The phase is indicated by differential element (DIF) operating phase(s).

Relevant events
Such events as for evolving faults are recorded with time-tags.

Power system quantities


The differential voltages in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded. The following power system
quantities are not recorded during evolving faults.

- Magnitude of differential voltage (Vd) for model 101 or phase differential voltage (Vda,
Vdb, Vdc) for model 201

 31 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

3.4.2 Event Recording


The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to
1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been stored, the
oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event
items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On”
(only recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by
setting. The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger
events” is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On”
mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set.
The set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events
EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording is started when the supervisory element DIFSV operates or a tripping
command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by the PLC
is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by
PLC.
The records include maximum 3 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and
the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix G can be
assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording

Model 101D 201D


Analog signal Vd Vda, Vdb, Vdc
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the “Instruction Manual
PC Interface, RSM100”.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 5.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

 32 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Recording time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s 3.5s 4.0s 4.5s 5.0s
50Hz 50 25 15 11 8 7 6 5 4 4 3
60Hz 42 21 13 9 7 6 5 4 3 3 3

Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown
in the table below.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
Timer 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s Post-fault recording time

Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

Element Range Step Default Remarks


[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[Vd err] OFF/ON ON Start by Binary Input signal

3.5 Metering Function


The GRB150 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
magnitudes of the phase differential voltage (Vda, Vdb, Vdc) or differential voltage (Vd) are
renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote
PC. The model 101 series measures a single phase quantity only.

 33 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting
and Monitoring), IEC61850 communication or IEC60870-5-103 communication via Ethernet
LAN port or RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, VIEW and RESET keys, monitoring jacks and an
RS232C connector.

LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for
5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.

LED
There are 9 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
(LED2) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
(LED3) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
(LED4) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
(LED5) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
(LED6) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.

LED1 to LED6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.

 34 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, statuses, and setting values on the LCD, as well as
to input or change setting values. The functions of each operation key are as follows:
 , , , : Used to move lines displayed on an LCD screen. Keys and are also
used to enter numerical values.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries or return to the upper (previous) screen.

 END : Used to end entering operation, or return to the upper (previous) screen or
turn off the display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

VIEW and RESET keys


Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault" and
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication"
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.

Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" (See
Appendix B) and setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or
transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks.

RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.

 35 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:


 RS232C port
 RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication
 IRIG-B port

RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed. (See Figure 3.1.3.)

RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port


The RS485 port or the fibre optic port is connected to the IEC60870-5-103 communication via
BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to
construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The RS485 port is
a screw terminal and the fibre optic port is the ST connector.
Ethernet LAN port is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication
networks using IEC 61850 protocol. This port can also be connected to the RSM. 100Base-TX
(T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the
back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

RS485 connection Fibre Optic


terminal (ST)

IRIG-B OPT
TB3 R IRIG-B
TB1 T
TB3
TB1

TB2
TB2
T1
F1
R
T

E E

Rear view Rear view


(a) RS485 + 100BASE-TX (b) Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX

Figure 4.1.1 Location of Communication Port

 36 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.2 Operation of the User Interface


The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation


When the GRB150 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is
off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display"
screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed
only when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without
entering the menu screens.

Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]

Metering 1
V d    .  V For Model 101

V d a    .  V For Model 201

Metering 2
V d b    .  V For Model 201

Metering 3
V d c    .  V For Model 201

To clear the latched indications (latched LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key
for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)

 37 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Displays in tripping

Latest fault
T r i p For Model 101

D I F - A B C For Model 201


T r i p

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.

Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation

LED lighting status


Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 - LED6)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off

Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short


period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.

 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

 38 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.

Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Latest fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET
key again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.

While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.

 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

 Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.

Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
             
        : A L M 1

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Latest fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.

 39 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRB150. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix D.

Menu Record F. record


E. record
D. record

Status Metering
Binary I/O
Ry element
Time synch.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast

Set. (view) Version


Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED

Set. (change) Password


Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection (Protected by password)
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Test Switch
Binary O/P
Logic circuit
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

 40 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault record, event record and disturbance record can be displayed or
erased.

Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or
SNTP), clock adjustment and LCD contrast.

Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it
has password security protection.

Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.

When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
M E N U
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 S e t . ( v i e w )
 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
 T e s t

To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to
turn off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. "/4" displayed on the far left means that the
screen is in the fourth hierarchical layer, while " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that
upper or lower lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on
the window, use or key.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

 41 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

T r i p 1 _
O f f / O n
V d e r r 1 _
O f f / O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in
Appendix D, press the END key.

The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and
then move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records
and counts such as trip count, ΣIy count and reclose count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records


To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o d
 F . r e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r

 Select "F. record" to display the "Fault record" screen.


/ 2 F . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r

 Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F . r e c o r d

# 1 1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
# 2 2 0 / S e p / 1 9 9 7
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 1 0 1
# 3 0 4 / J u l / 1 9 9 7
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 2 9 9
# 4 2 8 / F e b / 1 9 9 7
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 4 1 2

 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press
the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

 42 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

/ 3 F . r e c o r d # 1
1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
D I F - A B C
T r i p
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
V d a    .  V
V d b    .  V
V d c    .  V
F a u l t v a l u e s
V d a    .  V
V d b    .  V
V d c    .  V
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear fault records, do the following:


 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "F. record" to display the "Fault record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records


To display event records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "E. record" to display the "Event record" screen.
/ 2 E . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r

 Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d

1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
T r i p O n
1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
V d e r r O n
1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
R l y . c h a n g e
The time is displayed by pressing the key.

 43 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

/ 3 E . r e c o r d

1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 2 5 5
T r i p O n
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 0 2 8
V d e r r O n
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 5 2 8
R l y . c h a n g e
Press the key to return the screen with date.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear event records, do the following:


 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "E. record" to display the "Event record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records


Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "D. record" to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/ 2 D . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r

 Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 D . r e c o r d

# 1 1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 4 0 1
# 2 2 0 / S e p / 1 9 9 7
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 3 8 8
# 3 0 4 / J u l / 1 9 9 7
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 4 4 4
# 4 2 8 / F e b / 1 9 9 7
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 8 7 6
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and

 44 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

keys.

To clear disturbance records, do the following:


 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "D. record" to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile
memory.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r T r i p s

 Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.


/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s     

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and
keys.

To clear each count, do the following:


 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
 Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.4 Displaying the Status Information

From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD and
is updated every second:
Metering data of the protected line
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of relay elements

 45 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Status of time synchronisation source


The user can also adjust the time of the internal clock and the LCD contrast in this sub-menu.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data


To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 B i n a r y I / O
 R e l a y e l e m e n t
 T i m e s y n c .
 C l o c k a d j u s t .
 L C D c o n t r a s t

 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.


/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V d    .  V
(Model 101)

/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V d a    .  V
V d b    .  V
V d c    .  V
(Model 201)

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs


To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary inputs and outputs status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P 2  0 0 0 0 

The display format is shown below.

[       ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 FAIL —
Output (OP2) HBO1 HBO2 HBO3 HBO4 — — — —

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to a binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix F. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the
photo-coupler output circuit.
Lines 2 and 3 show the binary output statuses. BO1 to BO6 of line 2 corresponding to the binary
outputs are a normal auxiliary relay, which are configurable. FAIL of line 3 corresponds to the
relay failure output. HBO1 to HBO4 of line 3 are a high-speed auxiliary relay, which are
configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input

 46 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
To display all the lines, press the and keys.

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Relay Elements


To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Relay element" to display the status of the relay elements.
Model 101:
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
 0 0 

Model 201:
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
 0 0 0 0 0 0 

The display format is as shown below.


Model 101:
[       ]
DIF, DIFSV DIF DIFSV

Model 201:
[       ]
A B C A B C
DIF, DIFSV
DIF DIFSV

This shows the operation status of differential elements and the supervisory element.
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the
element is in operation.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source


The internal clock of the GRB150 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks
are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the
following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
B I : I n a c t .
I R I G : I n a c t .
I E C : I n a c t .
 S N T P : A c t . ( S r v 1 )
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

 47 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment


To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9 L o c Loc:Local, BI:BI, IRI:IRIG-B, IEC:IEC103, SNT:SNTP
M i n u t e
5 6 _
H o u r
2 2
D a y
1 2
M o n t h
1 1
Y e a r
2 0 0 1
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [IEC] or [RSM] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and
return to the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast


To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
L C D c o n t r a s t

 Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The screen becomes dark by pressing the
key and light by pressing the key.

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings set in the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:

 48 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Relay version
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

4.2.5.1 Relay Version


To view the relay version, do the following.
 Select the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
 V e r s i o n
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 B i n a r y O / P
 L E D

 Select "Version" to display the relay version screen.


/ 2 V e r s i o n
 R e l a y t y p e
 S e r i a l N o .
 S o f t w a r e

 Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R B 1 5 0 - 1 0 1 D - 1 0
- A 0

 Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.


 Select "Software" to display the relay software type form.
 M a i n s o f t w a r e
G S P    -   - 
 I E C 6 1 8 5 0 e n g .
      -   - 
 P L C d a t a
           
(         )
 I E C 1 0 3 d a t a
           

 49 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

(         )
 I E C 6 1 8 5 0 d a t a
           
(         )
 G O O S E s u b s c .
           
(         )

4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all
necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the
"active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method


There are three setting methods to enter as follows:
- A selective item
- A text string
- Numerical values

To enter a selected item


If a screen below is displayed, perform the settings as follows.

 50 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and
keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e)
 P a s s w o r d
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 B i n a r y O / P
 L E D

 Move the cursor to a setting item.


 Press the ENTER key.

To enter a text string


Text strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
 D e s c r i p t i o n

To select a character, use keys , , and to move the blinking cursor down, left, up and
right. "" and "" on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered within the brackets.

A B C D E F G
H I L K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `

 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER
key.
 Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the
brackets.
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

 51 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first
step.

To enter numerical values


When a screen shown below is displayed, perform the settings as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment.
The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and
keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

D I F V
1 0 _
D I F S V V
5 _
T V D S V s
0 . 5 0 _
D I F C C
1 . 0 0 _
T C L P s
0 . 0 1 _
T C L E s
0 . 0 0 _
T C L R s
0 . 0 0 _

 Move the cursor to a setting line.


 Press the or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or
key.
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry.

 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper
screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing
the and keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any of the entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER
key, all the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the
upper one.

To complete the setting


After making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are
not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the

 52 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

following steps.
 Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation
screen shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before
returning to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new
settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel the entries. In the latter case, the
screen turns back to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to
cancel entries made so far and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as
follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
/ 2 P a s s w o r d
 S e t t i n g
 T e s t

 Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.


 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

I n p u t  _ 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e  _ 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different
from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the
"Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch password!"
Re-entry is then requested.

 Select "Test" to set the password for the test.


Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.

Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Set.
(change)" sub-menu screens.

 53 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

P a s s w o r d  _ 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

Canceling or changing the password


To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen.
The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password


Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRB150 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Description
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 A l a r m 1 T e x t
 A l a r m 2 T e x t
 A l a r m 3 T e x t
 A l a r m 4 T e x t

 To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `

 Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method
The plant name and special items entered are viewed with the "Set.(view)" sub-menu and
attached to disturbance records when they are displayed on a local or a remote PC.

 54 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
Note: The settings related to IEC60870-5-103 communication are available for the relay with dual
RS485 port.
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s
 A d d r . / P a r a m .
 S w i t c h

 Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m

I E C
2 _
S Y A D J
0
I P 1 - 1
1 9 2
I P 1 - 2
1 6 8
I P 1 - 3
1 9
I P 1 - 4
1 7 2
S M 1 - 1
2 5 5
S M 1 - 2
2 5 5
S M 1 - 3
2 5 5
S M 1 - 4
0
G W1 - 1
1 9 2
G W1 - 2
1 6 8
G W1 - 3
1 9
G W 1 - 4
1
:
:
S I 4 - 1
0
S I 4 - 2
0
S I 4 - 3
0
S I 4 - 4
0
S M O D E

 55 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

0
D E A D T m i n
1 2 0
G O I N T s
6 0
P G 1 - 1
0
P G 1 - 2
0
P G 1 - 3
0
P G 1 - 4
0
P G 2 - 1
0
P G 2 - 2
0
P G 2 - 3
0
P G 2 - 4
0

 Enter the address number on "IEC" column for IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation
value on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time synchronization of protocol used (:
lags the time, +: leads the time).
Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway
for GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for
SNTP server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to
maintain synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1",
and synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if
GOOSE message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive
time.
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: , , , 
IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4
SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.
 Press the ENTER key.

CAUTION Do not overlap the relay address number.


 Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed
(baud rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.
/ 3 S w i t c h .

2 3 2 C 0
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
I E C B R 1
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
I E C B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d

 56 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

8 5 0 B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
8 5 0 A U T 0
O f f / O n
T S T M O D 0
O f f / O n
G S E C H K
O f f / O n
P I N G C H K
O f f / O n

 Select the number and press the ENTER key.


<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC60870-5-103 communication.

<850BLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC61850 communication.
<850AUT>
With IEC61850 communication, GRB150 provides access restriction which permits a client
access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password). The
password is a 4-digit number shared with RSM100.
Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address
which is set on PG-.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function


To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" screen.

 57 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

/ 2 R e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r

Setting the event recording


 Select "E. record" to display the "Event record" screen.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d

B I T R N
1 0 0 _
E V 1
3 0 0 1 _
E V 2
3 0 0 2 _
E V 3
3 0 0 3 _
:
:
E V 1 2 7
3 1 2 7 _
E V 1 2 8
3 1 2 8 _
<BITRN>
Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered,
both status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is
recorded for EV21 to EV128 events.

<EV>
Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record as the event. It is recommended that this setting
can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen. (Refer
to Section 3.4.2.)

Setting the disturbance recording


 Select "D. record" to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/ 3 D . r e c o r d
 T i m e / s t a r t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 B i n a r y s i g .

 Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.


/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r

T i m e s
2 . 0 _

 Enter the recording time setting.


To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Scheme switch"

 58 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T R I P 1 _
O f f / O n
V d e r r 1 _
O f f / O n

 Enter 1 to use as a starter.


 If the selected switch is not used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
 Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .

S I G 1
3 0 0 1 _
S I G 2
3 0 0 2
S I G 3
3 0 0 3
S I G 3 2
3 0 3 2

 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix C.

Setting the counter


 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T C S P E N 0 _
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
C B S M E N 0
O f f / O n
T C A E N 0
O f f / O n

 Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.


To set threshold setting, do the following:
 Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t

T C A L M
1 0 0 0 0 _

 59 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Enter the threshold settings.

4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status setting" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
 T i m e s y n c
 T i m e z o n e

Setting the time synchronisation


The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the external IRIG-B time standard
signal, RSM clock, or by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.
 Select "Time sync" to display the "Time synchronisation" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c 0 _
O f / B I / I R I / I E C / S N

 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.


Enter 0 (=of) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=IRI) to be synchronised with IRIG-B time signal.
Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.
Enter 4(=SN) to be synchronised with SNTP.
Note: When selecting BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, check that they are active on the
"Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone


When the calendar clock is synchronised with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to
transform GMT to the local time.
 Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
/ 3 T i m e z o n e

G M T h r s
+ 9 _
G M T m M i n
+ 0
 Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs)
and GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.

 60 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRB150 can have 4 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set protection, do the
following:
 Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
 C h a n g e a c t . g p .
 C h a n g e s e t
 C o p y g p .

Changing the active group


 Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change active group" screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . 1 _

 Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.

Changing the settings


All the setting items have default values that are set when the product was shipped except names
and descriptions specified by the user. For the default values, see Appendix C and G.
To change the settings, do the following:
 Select "Change set." to display the "Change setting" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 
 G r o u p 1
 G r o u p 2
 G r o u p 3
 G r o u p 4
 G r o u p 5
 G r o u p 6
 G r o u p 7
 G r o u p 8

 Select the group number to change the settings and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 G r o u p 
 P a r a m e t e r
 T r i p

Setting the parameter


Enter the line name as follows:
 Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
 L i n e n a m e

 Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.


 Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.

 61 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Setting the trip function


To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t

Setting the scheme switch


 Select "Scheme sw" to display the "Scheme switch" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w

V D C H K 1 _
O f f / O n
S V C N T 0
A L M & B L K / A L M
C L E N 0
O f f / F 1 / F 2

VDCHK
 Enter 1 to perform the differential voltage supervision or enter 0 if you do not need to
perform it, and press the ENTER key.

SVCNT
 Enter 0 (= ALM&BLK) to output an alarm and to block the trip function by the
differential voltage monitoring.

CLEN
 Enter 1 (= F1) to use BI1 for the function 1 of the cold load protection.
 Enter 2 (= F2) to use BI1 for the function 2 of the cold load protection.
 Enter 0 (= Off) not to use BI1 for the cold load protection.
 Press the END key to return to the "Trip" screen.

Setting the protection elements


 Select "Prot. element" to display the "Protection element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

D I F V
1 0 _
D I F S V V
5 _
T V D S V s
0 . 5 0 _
D I F C C
1 . 0 0
T C L P s
0 . 0 1

 62 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

T C L E s
0 . 0 0
T C L R s
0 . 0 0

 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Trip" screen.

Setting group copy


To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
 Select "Copy gp" on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C o p y A t o B

A _
B _

 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER
key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input


The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme
logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table
3.2.2.
 Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
. B I 1
. B I 2
. B I 3
. B I 4
. B I 5
. B I 6
. B I 7
. B I 8

Selection of Binary Input


 Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.

/ 3 B I 
 T i m e r s
 F u n c t i o n s

 63 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Setting timers
 Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s

P U D s Pick-up delay setting


0 . 0 0 _
D O D s Drop-off delay setting
0 . 0 0

 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.


 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.

Setting Functions
 Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

S N S 1 _
N o r m / I n v

 To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER
key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.

4.2.6.9 Binary Output


All the binary outputs of the GRB150 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay.
Available signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix H shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay


 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 B O 1
 B O 2
 B O 3
 B O 4
 B O 5
 B O 6
 H B O 1

 64 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 H B O 2
 H B O 3
 H B O 4
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the
"BO" screen.
/ 3 B O 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
 F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer


 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t

 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset
timing and press the ENTER key.

 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.


Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n # 1
1 0 0 0 _
I n # 2
1 0 0 1
I n # 3
1 0 0 2
I n # 4
1 0 0 3
I n # 5
1 0 0 4
I n # 6
1 0 0 5
T B O s
0 . 2 0

 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 476 and 487 to 490
(signal names: "BO1_OP" to "BO6_OP" and "HBO1_OP" to "HBO4_OP"). And set the

 65 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

delay time of timer TBO.


Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six LEDs of the GRB150 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can
be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be
assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
 L E D
 V i r t u a l L E D

Selection of real LEDs


 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
 L E D 1
 L E D 2
 L E D 3
 L E D 4
 L E D 5
 L E D 6

 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
 F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and reset type


 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h

 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER
key.

 66 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.


Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.

Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

I n # 1
1 0 0 0 _
I n # 2
1 0 0 1
I n # 3
1 0 0 2
I n # 4
1 0 0 3

 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.


Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Selection of virtual LEDs


 Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
 I N D 1
 I N D 2

 Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4 I N D 
 R e s e t
 F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing


 Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t

R e s e t 0 _
I n s t / L a t c h

 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER
key.
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

 67 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

B I T 1
1 0 0 0 _
B I T 2
1 0 0 1
B I T 8
1 0 0 7

 Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal


referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.


Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.7 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test
screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If
the password trap ser, enter the password in the following screen.
P a s s w o r d  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.

4.2.7.1 Scheme switch


The automatic monitoring function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to
"OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling the A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
 Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
 S w i t c h
 B i n a r y O / P
 L o g i c c i r c u i t

 Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.


/ 2 S w i t c h

A . M . F . 1 _
O f f / O n

 68 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

C L P T S T
O f f / N - C L / C L
I E C T S T 0
O f f / O n

 Enter 0 or 1 to disable the A.M.F. or not and press the ENTER key for each switch.

 Enter 0(=Off) to disable the cold load protection, or enter 1(=N-CL) forcibly to set to
“No-cold load condition” or enter 2(=CL) forcibly to set to “Cold load condition”. And
press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by
IEC60870-5-103 communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay


It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the
external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the
LCD displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 3 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 4 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 5 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 6 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 2 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 3 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 4 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
F A I L 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key to operate the output relay(s) forcibly.

 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen
shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relay(s).

 69 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

 Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit


It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix B with
monitoring jacks A and B.
 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
4 8 _

 Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.

 Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER
key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.

 70 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.3 Personal Computer Interface


The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the differential voltage are
available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of differential voltage waveform: Oscillograph, vector display
 Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System


The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via Ethernet LAN networks using a remote PC as shown in Figure 4.4.1.

TCP/IP
(LAN cable) HUB

TO
IN
TAL V TO
IN
TAL V
TE TE
RE RE
SHI
SER
R
AR
I SHI
SER
R
AR
I
ST ST
SE SE
BA
AVIC
B0V
IM EENE
C
BA
AVIC
B0V
IM EENE
C
IN IN
T T
E TE E TE
P NWA P NWA
G G

Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

 71 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface


The GRB150 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
 Measurand data: differential voltage
 Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors
1.2 and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.

4.6 IEC 61850 Communication


GRB150 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard. Station bus
communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within
substation control and automation systems via Ethernet LAN.
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC
61850 communication.

Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network

 72 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4.7 Clock Function


The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock or IEC60870-5-103. This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to
PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or
“OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising
is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing
if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie
the number of seconds is incremented).

n sec (n+1) sec


500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected
"RSM" in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the
relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

 73 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any damage is found, contact the vendor.
Check that the following accessories are attached.
 3 pins for the monitoring jack, packed in a plastic bag.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting


A flush mounting relay is delivered. Appendix E shows the case outlines.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge


CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.

5.4 Handling Precautions


A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, the precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.

CAUTION
 Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
 Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

 74 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
 Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area.

5.5 External Connections


External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.

 75 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6. Commissioning and Maintenance


6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRB150 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or a local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to
avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which
circuits function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits

Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Human interface

Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.

The following tests are included:


On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test

 76 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
 The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and
attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing

CAUTION
 When testing the relay, house it in the case and test it.
 While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
 Before turning on the power, check the followings:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
 If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then it is
recommended that all fault records, event records and disturbance records be cleared soon
after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may
contain uncertain data.
 Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

 77 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase voltage source
1 DC power supply
1 AC voltmeter
1 DC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.

For the default settings, see the following appendixes:


Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.

Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

 78 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.4 Hardware Tests


The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC voltage
source are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.

 Press the RESET key and check that black dots appear on the whole screen.

LED display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit
in red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)

VIEW and RESET keys


 Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and
"Metering" screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
 Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.

Other operation keys


 Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

 Repeat this for all keys.

 79 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.


GRB150

TB2 -A1
BI1

-B1

DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  -B9

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

 Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.


/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P 2  0 0 0 0 

 Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at
once.

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The
output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix F.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD
will display the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 3 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 4 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 5 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 80 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

B O 6 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 2 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 3 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
H B O 4 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
F A I L 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 Enter 1 at any B/O(s) tested and press the ENTER key.

 After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.


 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying the checking voltages to the AC input circuits and
verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase voltage source is required.
GRB150
EB-10
V TB1-1 TB2-1 TB1 -1
-2 Va -2 Va
Single-phase -2
voltage -3 -3
source Vb -3
-4 -4 Vb
-5 -4
Vc -5
-6 -6 -5
Vc
-8 -6

 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9

*(Note) EB-101: single-phase, EB-102: three-phase

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit

 Check the metering data on the "Metering" screen.


"Setting (view)" sub-menu  "Status" setting screen  "Metering" screen

 81 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 Open the Metering screen in the Status sub-menu.


"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply AC voltages and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.

 82 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.5 Function Test


6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realised by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
4 8 _
When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".

CAUTION
 Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
 Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
 Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.

 83 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.5.1.1 Differential element DIF


The differential element is checked for the following:
 Operating voltage value
 Operating time

Operating voltage value


Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The minimum operating voltage value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
GRB150
V EB-10
TB1-1(TB1-1) TB1-4(TB2-1)
 TB1 -1
Single-phase Va
voltage
source TB1-2(TB1-2) TB1-5(TB2-2)
 -2

-3
A
-4 Monitoring
jack
-8 -5 0V
-6

DC  TB3 -A5
power
supply  -B5


DC
voltmeter


*(Note) EB-101: single-phase, EB-102: three-phase. The terminal No. shown in the parentheses are in the case of EB-102.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Voltage Value Test Circuit

The output signal numbers of the DIF elements are as follows:


Element Signal number Remarks
DIF-A (DIF) 11
DIF-B 12
DIF-C 13

 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter signal number 11 to observe the DIF-A operation at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.

 Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the
value at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 10% of the setting value.

 84 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Operating time
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.

GRB150
V EB-10
TB1-1 TB1-4 TB1 -1
Single-phase (TB1-1) (TB2-1)
Va
voltage
source TB1-2 TB1-5 -2
(TB1-2) (TB2-2)

A
Monitoring
jack
0V
-8

DC  TB3 -A5
power
supply  -B5

Start

Time
counter
Stop
0V

*(Note) EB-101: single-phase, EB-102: three-phase. The terminal No. shown in the parentheses are in the case of EB-102.

Figure 6.5.2 Operating Time Test

 Set the test current to 2 times the DIF setting value.


 Apply the test voltage and measure the operating time.
 Check that the operating time is 20 ms or less.

6.5.1.2 Supervisory element DIFSV


The supervisory element is checked for the operating voltage value.

Operating voltage value


Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The minimum operating voltage value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
The output signal numbers of the DIF elements are as follows:

Element Signal number Remarks


DIFSV-A (DIFSV) 14
DIFSV-B 15
DIFSV-C 16

 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter signal number 14 to observe the DIFSV-A operation at monitoring jack A and press

 85 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

the ENTER key.

 Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the
value at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 10% of the setting value.

6.5.2 Protection Scheme

In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relay HBO assigned.

Differential tripping
The tripping should be checked for the voltage which is two times or larger than the minimum
operating voltage DIF. Operating time is measured by the operating time of the tripping
command output relay. It is usually 20ms.
Check that the indications and recordings are correct.

6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Table 3.4.1. The top event is an external event and others are
internal events. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see
Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event Records" screen is correct.
Note: Whether to record or not can be set for each event. Change the status of the binary input signal
after confirming that the related event is set to record. (The default setting enables all the events
to be recorded.)
Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC with the RSM100 software. Check that the descriptions on the
PC are correct. For details on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100
Manual.

 86 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.6 Conjunctive Tests


6.6.1 On Load Test

With the relay connected to the line which is carrying a load current, it is possible to check the
polarity of the current transformer with the metering displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V d    .  V
(Model 101)

/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V d a    .  V
V d b    .  V
V d c    .  V
(Model 201)
 Check that the differential voltage Vd or Vda, Vdb and Vdc are sufficiently smaller than
the DIF and DIFSV setting values.

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P" screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.

Tripping circuit
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
HBO1 is a tripping command output relay with one normally open contact.
 Enter 1 for HBO1 and press the ENTER key.

 Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay HBO1 and check that the No.1
breaker is tripped.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

 Repeat the above for other HBOs.

 87 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test
procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair


Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table
6.7.1 shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location


Message Failure location
CB or
Relay Unit AC cable PLC, IEC61850 data
cable
Err: SUM (Flash memory)
Err: ROM (ROM data)
Err: RAM (SRAM)
Err: CPU (CPU)
Err: Invalid 
Err: NMI 
Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)
Err: EEP (EEPROM)
Err: A/D (A/D converter)
Err: SP (Sampling)
Err: PCI 
Err: DC (DC power supply circuit)
Err: TC (Tripping circuit)(1)  (2)
Err: CB  (Circuit breaker)(1)  (2)
Err: Vd  (1)  (2)
Err: PLC (PLC data)
Err: MAP (IEC61850 mapping data)
Err: RTC (SNTP setting)
Err: LAN (Ethernet LAN)
Err: GOOSE (GOOSE subscribe)
Err: Ping (Ping response)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.

If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power

 88 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.

If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing a Failed Relay Unit

If a failure is identified in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can recover
the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component
level is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model No. and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model No. is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1

Replacing the relay unit


CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:


 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to
discharge.
 Disconnect the trip outputs.
 Short-circuit all AC current inputs.
 Unscrew the relay front cover.
 Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
 To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you.
(See Figure 6.7.1.)
 Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:
 Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
 Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.

 89 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IN SERVICE IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW TRIP VIEW
ALARM ALARM

RESET RESET

A B 0V CAN ENTER A B 0V CAN ENTER


CEL CEL

END END
Handle
Pull up handle

Bind screw

Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit


Front view Front view
6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to put the relay into service.
 Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and
the "ALARM" red LED is not lit.
 Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage

The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be between 25C and +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.

 90 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

7. Putting Relay into Service


The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing
the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
 Check that all external connections are correct.
 Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and
clock are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded
during the tests.
CAUTION:
If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then it is
recommended that all fault records, event records and disturbance records be
cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may
have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
 Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the
"Auto-supervision" screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front
panel.

 91 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 92 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix A
Block Diagram

 93 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Model 101 447


1 DIF-OR
DIF
1 11 21
A & DIF TRIP-A
12 22
DIF B & DIF TRIP-B
13 23
C & DIF TRIP-C
Model 201 1536 DIF_BLOCK 1 28
SVCNT 1 DIF
COLD LOAD  & TRIP
1
from Figure 2.2.2. "ALM&BLK"

Model 101 448


DIFSV 1 DIFSV-OR
14 TVDSV 27
1 24
A & t 0 VD ERR
1
15
DIFSV B 25
& t 0
16 26
C t 0
&
Model 201
0.10 - 60.00s
A.M.F ON
VDCHK

"ON"
1537 DIFSV_BLOCK 1

Block Diagram of GRB150-101, -201

DIF: Differential element DIFSV: Supervisory element of DIF


VDCHK: Vd check SVCNT: Supervision control switch
VD ERR: Voltage differential error

 94 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix B
Signal List

 95 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


0 CONSTANT_0 constant 0
1 CONSTANT_1 constant 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 COLD_LOAD COLD LOAD relay element output
11 DIF-A DIF-A relay element output
12 DIF-B DIF-B relay element output
13 DIF-C DIF-C relay element output
14 DIFSV-A DIFSV-A relay element output
15 DIFSV-B DIFSV-B relay element output
16 DIFSV-C DIFSV-C relay element output
17
18
19
20
21 DIF_TRIP-A DIF trip command (A Phase)
22 DIF_TRIP-B DIF trip command (B Phase)
23 DIF_TRIP-C DIF trip command (C Phase)
24 VD_ERR-A VD_ERR command (A Phase)
25 VD_ERR-B VD_ERR command (B Phase)
26 VD_ERR-C VD_ERR command (C Phase)
27 VD_ERR VD_ERR command
28 DIF_TRIP DIF trip command
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54 DIF-AT FAULT RECORD DATA
55 DIF-BT ditto
56 DIF-CT ditto
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
:
:
349
350

 96 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389 CB_CLOSE CB closed status
390 CB_OPEN CB opened status
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
:
:
439
440

 97 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


441
442
443
444
445
446
447 DIF-OR DIF relay (3PHASE OR)
448 DIFSV-OR DIFSV relay (3PHASE OR)
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471 BO1_OP Binary output 1
472 BO2_OP Binary output 2
473 BO3_OP Binary output 3
474 BO4_OP Binary output 4
475 BO5_OP Binary output 5
476 BO6_OP Binary output 6
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487 HBO1_OP High speed binary output 1
488 HBO2_OP High speed binary output 2
489 HBO3_OP High speed binary output 3
490 HBO4_OP High speed binary output 4
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
:
:
759
760

 98 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1
769 BI2_COMMAND Binary input signal BI2
770 BI3_COMMAND Binary input signal BI3
771 BI4_COMMAND Binary input signal BI4
772 BI5_COMMAND Binary input signal BI5
773 BI6_COMMAND Binary input signal BI6
774 BI7_COMMAND Binary input signal BI7
775 BI8_COMMAND Binary input signal BI8
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
:
:
998
999
1000

 99 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040 FAULT_PHA_A fault_phase_A
1041 FAULT_PHA_B fault_phase_B
1042 FAULT_PHA_C fault_phase_C
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
:
:
1239
1240

 100 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked
1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode
1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active
1244 GROUP2_ACTIVE group2 active
1245 GROUP3_ACTIVE group3 active
1246 GROUP4_ACTIVE group4 active
1247 GROUP5_ACTIVE group5 active
1248 GROUP6_ACTIVE group6 active
1249 GROUP7_ACTIVE group7 active
1250 GROUP8_ACTIVE group8 active
1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE
1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
1253 AMF_OFF SV BLOCK
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258 RELAY_FAIL-A
1259
1260
1261 TRIP-H Trip signal hold
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure
1271 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
1272 TC_ALARM Trip counter alarm
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1285 BI2_COM_UF Binary input signal BI2 (unfiltered)
1286 BI3_COM_UF Binary input signal BI3 (unfiltered)
1287 BI4_COM_UF Binary input signal BI4 (unfiltered)
1288 BI5_COM_UF Binary input signal BI5 (unfiltered)
1289 BI6_COM_UF Binary input signal BI6 (unfiltered)
1290 BI7_COM_UF Binary input signal BI7 (unfiltered)
1291 BI8_COM_UF Binary input signal BI8 (unfiltered)
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310

 101 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328 GOOSE_IN_Q1 Goose Input Quality #1
1329 GOOSE_IN_Q2 Goose Input Quality #2
1330 GOOSE_IN_Q3 Goose Input Quality #3
1331 GOOSE_IN_Q4 Goose Input Quality #4
1332 GOOSE_IN_Q5 Goose Input Quality #5
1333 GOOSE_IN_Q6 Goose Input Quality #6
1334 GOOSE_IN_Q7 Goose Input Quality #7
1335 GOOSE_IN_Q8 Goose Input Quality #8
1336 GOOSE_IN_Q9 Goose Input Quality #9
1337 GOOSE_IN_Q10 Goose Input Quality #10
1338 GOOSE_IN_Q11 Goose Input Quality #11
1339 GOOSE_IN_Q12 Goose Input Quality #12
1340 GOOSE_IN_Q13 Goose Input Quality #13
1341 GOOSE_IN_Q14 Goose Input Quality #14
1342 GOOSE_IN_Q15 Goose Input Quality #15
1343 GOOSE_IN_Q16 Goose Input Quality #16
1344 GOOSE_IN_Q17 Goose Input Quality #17
1345 GOOSE_IN_Q18 Goose Input Quality #18
1346 GOOSE_IN_Q19 Goose Input Quality #19
1347 GOOSE_IN_Q20 Goose Input Quality #20
1348 GOOSE_IN_Q21 Goose Input Quality #21
1349 GOOSE_IN_Q22 Goose Input Quality #22
1350 GOOSE_IN_Q23 Goose Input Quality #23
1351 GOOSE_IN_Q24 Goose Input Quality #24
1352 GOOSE_IN_Q25 Goose Input Quality #25
1353 GOOSE_IN_Q26 Goose Input Quality #26
1354 GOOSE_IN_Q27 Goose Input Quality #27
1355 GOOSE_IN_Q28 Goose Input Quality #28
1356 GOOSE_IN_Q29 Goose Input Quality #29
1357 GOOSE_IN_Q30 Goose Input Quality #30
1358 GOOSE_IN_Q31 Goose Input Quality #31
1359 GOOSE_IN_Q32 Goose Input Quality #32
1360 GOOSE_IN_1 Goose Input #1
1361 GOOSE_IN_2 Goose Input #2
1362 GOOSE_IN_3 Goose Input #3
1363 GOOSE_IN_4 Goose Input #4
1364 GOOSE_IN_5 Goose Input #5
1365 GOOSE_IN_6 Goose Input #6
1366 GOOSE_IN_7 Goose Input #7
1367 GOOSE_IN_8 Goose Input #8
1368 GOOSE_IN_9 Goose Input #9
1369 GOOSE_IN_10 Goose Input #10
1370 GOOSE_IN_11 Goose Input #11
1371 GOOSE_IN_12 Goose Input #12
1372 GOOSE_IN_13 Goose Input #13
1373 GOOSE_IN_14 Goose Input #14
1374 GOOSE_IN_15 Goose Input #15
1375 GOOSE_IN_16 Goose Input #16
1376 GOOSE_IN_17 Goose Input #17
1377 GOOSE_IN_18 Goose Input #18
1378 GOOSE_IN_19 Goose Input #19
1379 GOOSE_IN_20 Goose Input #20
1380 GOOSE_IN_21 Goose Input #21

 102 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1381 GOOSE_IN_22 Goose Input #22
1382 GOOSE_IN_23 Goose Input #23
1383 GOOSE_IN_24 Goose Input #24
1384 GOOSE_IN_25 Goose Input #25
1385 GOOSE_IN_26 Goose Input #26
1386 GOOSE_IN_27 Goose Input #27
1387 GOOSE_IN_28 Goose Input #28
1388 GOOSE_IN_29 Goose Input #29
1389 GOOSE_IN_30 Goose Input #30
1390 GOOSE_IN_31 Goose Input #31
1391 GOOSE_IN_32 Goose Input #32
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401 LOCAL_OP_ACT local operation active
1402 REMOTE_OP_ACT remote operation active
1403 NORM_LED_ON IN-SERVICE LED ON
1404 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON
1405 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON
1406 TEST_LED_ON TEST LED ON
1407
1408 PRG_LED_RESET Latched programmable LED RESET
1409 LED_RESET TRIP LED RESET
1410
1411
1412
1413 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
1414 PRG_LED1_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
1415 PRG_LED2_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED2 ON
1416 PRG_LED3_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED3 ON
1417 PRG_LED4_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED4 ON
1418 PRG_LED5_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED5 ON
1419 PRG_LED6_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED6 ON
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430 LCD_IND. VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command
1431 LCD_IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
1432 LCD_IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command
1433
1434
1435 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear
1436 E.Record_CLR Event record clear
1437 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear
1438 Data_Lost Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1439 TP_COUNT_CLR Trip counter cleared
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change
1446 IEC103_data_CHG IEC-103 data change
1447 IEC850_data_CHG IEC-850 data change
1448 Sys.set_change System setting change
1449 Rly.set_change Relay setting change
1450 Grp.set_change Group setting change

 103 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed)
1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed)
1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed)
1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed)
1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed)
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465 DC_supply_err DC supply error
1466 RTC_err RTC stopped
1467
1468 GOOSE_stop GOOSE stopped
1469 Ping_err Ping no anwer
1470 PLC_err PLC stopeed
1471 61850_err 61850 stopped
1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error
1473 ROM_RAM_err Rom - Ram mismatch error
1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error
1475 BU_RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1476
1477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error
1478
1479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error
1480 CPU_err Program error
1481 Invalid Invalid error
1482 NMI NMI
1483 Sampling_err Sampling error
1484 DIO_err DIO card connection error
1485 LAN_err LAN error
1486 LCD_err LCD panel connection error
1487 ROM_data_err 8M Romdata error
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520

 104 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535

 105 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1536 DIF_BLOCK DIF trip block command
1537 DIFSV_BLOCK DIFSV trip block command
1538 CB_FOR_CLP CLP command
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605

 106 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632 TC_FAIL Trip circuit Fail Alarm commamd
1633 CB_N/O_CONT CB N/O contact commamd
1634 CB_N/C_CONT CB N/C contact commamd
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639 IND.RESET Indication reset command
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667 TP_COUNT Trip counter count up command
1668
1669
1670
1671
:
:
2558
2559

 107 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


2560 DISP.ALARM1 Indicate the alarm display
2561 DISP.ALARM2 ditto
2562 DISP.ALARM3 ditto
2563 DISP.ALARM4 ditto
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK Synchronise clock commamd
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET Alarm LED set
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1
2625 F.RECORD2 2
2626 F.RECORD3 3
2627 F.RECORD4 4
2628
2629

 108 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1
2633 D.RECORD2 2
2634 D.RECORD3 3
2635 D.RECORD4 4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed command (Change to group1)
2641 SET.GROUP2 2
2642 SET.GROUP3 3
2643 SET.GROUP4 4
2644 SET.GROUP5 5
2645 SET.GROUP6 6
2646 SET.GROUP7 7
2647 SET.GROUP8 8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1 User configurable trip mode in fault record
2657 CON_TPMD2 ditto
2658 CON_TPMD3 ditto
2659 CON_TPMD4 ditto
2660 CON_TPMD5 ditto
2661 CON_TPMD6 ditto
2662 CON_TPMD7 ditto
2663 CON_TPMD8 ditto
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV protection inactivate command received
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
:
:
2799
2800

 109 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055

 110 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125

 111 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195

 112 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Signal Name Contents


3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256

 113 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

For IEC61850
Measure Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


0 Vda_mag Vda magnitude
1 Vdb_mag Vdb magnitude
2 Vdc_mag Vdc magnitude

 114 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Setting Table
NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS
0 GROUP_NO number of groups 61
1 ACT_GROUP active group number 62
2 EDIT_GROUP edit group number 63
3 CHG_GROUP change active group 64
4 65
5
66
6
67
7
68
8
69
9
70
10
71
11
72
12
73
13
74
14
75
15
76
16
77
17
78
18
79
19
80
20
81
21
82
22
83
23
84
24
85
25
86
26
87
27
88
28
89
29
90 1A2_5A1 1A:2 5A:1
30
91 1A1_5A2 1A:1 5A:2
31
92 1A1_5A0 1A:1 5A:0
32
33
93 1A0_5A1 1A:0 5A:1
34 94 1A3_5A2 1A:3 5A:2
35 95
36 96
37 97
38 98
39 99
40 100 SoftType Software type
41 101 MappingName Mapping info
42 102 Vendor venfor name
43 103
44 104
45 105
46 106
47 107
48 108
49 109
50 110 Const0 Always 0
51 111 Const1 Always 1
52 112 Const2 Always 2
53 113 Const3 Always 3
54 114
55 115
56 116
57 117
58 118
59 119
60

 115 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Status Table
NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS
0 GOOSE_V_001 GOOSE_Value_001 51 GOOSE_V_052 GOOSE_Value_052
1 GOOSE_V_002 GOOSE_Value_002 52 GOOSE_V_053 GOOSE_Value_053
2 GOOSE_V_003 GOOSE_Value_003 53 GOOSE_V_054 GOOSE_Value_054
3 GOOSE_V_004 GOOSE_Value_004 54 GOOSE_V_055 GOOSE_Value_055
4 GOOSE_V_005 GOOSE_Value_005 55 GOOSE_V_056 GOOSE_Value_056
5 GOOSE_V_006 GOOSE_Value_006 56 GOOSE_V_057 GOOSE_Value_057
6 GOOSE_V_007 GOOSE_Value_007 57 GOOSE_V_058 GOOSE_Value_058
7 GOOSE_V_008 GOOSE_Value_008 58 GOOSE_V_059 GOOSE_Value_059
8 GOOSE_V_009 GOOSE_Value_009 59 GOOSE_V_060 GOOSE_Value_060
9 GOOSE_V_010 GOOSE_Value_010 60 GOOSE_V_061 GOOSE_Value_061
10 GOOSE_V_011 GOOSE_Value_011 61 GOOSE_V_062 GOOSE_Value_062
11 GOOSE_V_012 GOOSE_Value_012 62 GOOSE_V_063 GOOSE_Value_063
12 GOOSE_V_013 GOOSE_Value_013 63 GOOSE_V_064 GOOSE_Value_064
13 GOOSE_V_014 GOOSE_Value_014 64 GOOSE_V_065 GOOSE_Value_065
14 GOOSE_V_015 GOOSE_Value_015 65 GOOSE_V_066 GOOSE_Value_066
15 GOOSE_V_016 GOOSE_Value_016 66 GOOSE_V_067 GOOSE_Value_067
16 GOOSE_V_017 GOOSE_Value_017 67 GOOSE_V_068 GOOSE_Value_068
17 GOOSE_V_018 GOOSE_Value_018 68 GOOSE_V_069 GOOSE_Value_069
18 GOOSE_V_019 GOOSE_Value_019 69 GOOSE_V_070 GOOSE_Value_070
19 GOOSE_V_020 GOOSE_Value_020 70 GOOSE_V_071 GOOSE_Value_071
20 GOOSE_V_021 GOOSE_Value_021 71 GOOSE_V_072 GOOSE_Value_072
21 GOOSE_V_022 GOOSE_Value_022 72 GOOSE_V_073 GOOSE_Value_073
22 GOOSE_V_023 GOOSE_Value_023 73 GOOSE_V_074 GOOSE_Value_074
23 GOOSE_V_024 GOOSE_Value_024 74 GOOSE_V_075 GOOSE_Value_075
24 GOOSE_V_025 GOOSE_Value_025 75 GOOSE_V_076 GOOSE_Value_076
25 GOOSE_V_026 GOOSE_Value_026 76 GOOSE_V_077 GOOSE_Value_077
26 GOOSE_V_027 GOOSE_Value_027 77 GOOSE_V_078 GOOSE_Value_078
27 GOOSE_V_028 GOOSE_Value_028 78 GOOSE_V_079 GOOSE_Value_079
28 GOOSE_V_029 GOOSE_Value_029 79 GOOSE_V_080 GOOSE_Value_080
29 GOOSE_V_030 GOOSE_Value_030 80 GOOSE_V_081 GOOSE_Value_081
30 GOOSE_V_031 GOOSE_Value_031 81 GOOSE_V_082 GOOSE_Value_082
31 GOOSE_V_032 GOOSE_Value_032 82 GOOSE_V_083 GOOSE_Value_083
32 GOOSE_V_033 GOOSE_Value_033 83 GOOSE_V_084 GOOSE_Value_084
33 GOOSE_V_034 GOOSE_Value_034 84 GOOSE_V_085 GOOSE_Value_085
34 GOOSE_V_035 GOOSE_Value_035 85 GOOSE_V_086 GOOSE_Value_086
35 GOOSE_V_036 GOOSE_Value_036 86 GOOSE_V_087 GOOSE_Value_087
36 GOOSE_V_037 GOOSE_Value_037 87 GOOSE_V_088 GOOSE_Value_088
37 GOOSE_V_038 GOOSE_Value_038 88 GOOSE_V_089 GOOSE_Value_089
38 GOOSE_V_039 GOOSE_Value_039 89 GOOSE_V_090 GOOSE_Value_090
39 GOOSE_V_040 GOOSE_Value_040 90 GOOSE_V_091 GOOSE_Value_091
40 GOOSE_V_041 GOOSE_Value_041 91 GOOSE_V_092 GOOSE_Value_092
41 GOOSE_V_042 GOOSE_Value_042 92 GOOSE_V_093 GOOSE_Value_093
42 GOOSE_V_043 GOOSE_Value_043 93 GOOSE_V_094 GOOSE_Value_094
43 GOOSE_V_044 GOOSE_Value_044 94 GOOSE_V_095 GOOSE_Value_095
44 GOOSE_V_045 GOOSE_Value_045 95 GOOSE_V_096 GOOSE_Value_096
45 GOOSE_V_046 GOOSE_Value_046 96 GOOSE_V_097 GOOSE_Value_097
46 GOOSE_V_047 GOOSE_Value_047 97 GOOSE_V_098 GOOSE_Value_098
47 GOOSE_V_048 GOOSE_Value_048 98 GOOSE_V_099 GOOSE_Value_099
48 GOOSE_V_049 GOOSE_Value_049 99 GOOSE_V_100 GOOSE_Value_100
49 GOOSE_V_050 GOOSE_Value_050 100 GOOSE_V_101 GOOSE_Value_101
50 GOOSE_V_051 GOOSE_Value_051 101 GOOSE_V_102 GOOSE_Value_102

 116 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


101 GOOSE_V_102 GOOSE_Value_102 151
102 GOOSE_V_103 GOOSE_Value_103 152
103 GOOSE_V_104 GOOSE_Value_104 153
104 GOOSE_V_105 GOOSE_Value_105 154
105 GOOSE_V_106 GOOSE_Value_106 155
106 GOOSE_V_107 GOOSE_Value_107 156
107 GOOSE_V_108 GOOSE_Value_108 157
108 GOOSE_V_109 GOOSE_Value_109 158
109 GOOSE_V_110 GOOSE_Value_110 159
110 GOOSE_V_111 GOOSE_Value_111 160
111 GOOSE_V_112 GOOSE_Value_112 161
112 GOOSE_V_113 GOOSE_Value_113 162
113 GOOSE_V_114 GOOSE_Value_114 163
114 GOOSE_V_115 GOOSE_Value_115 164
115 GOOSE_V_116 GOOSE_Value_116 165
116 GOOSE_V_117 GOOSE_Value_117 166
117 GOOSE_V_118 GOOSE_Value_118 167
118 GOOSE_V_119 GOOSE_Value_119 168
119 GOOSE_V_120 GOOSE_Value_120 169
120 GOOSE_V_121 GOOSE_Value_121 170
121 GOOSE_V_122 GOOSE_Value_122 171
122 GOOSE_V_123 GOOSE_Value_123 172
123 GOOSE_V_124 GOOSE_Value_124 173
124 GOOSE_V_125 GOOSE_Value_125 174
125 GOOSE_V_126 GOOSE_Value_126 175
126 GOOSE_V_127 GOOSE_Value_127 176
127 GOOSE_V_128 GOOSE_Value_128 177
128 XCBR_POS0 XCBR_POS0 178
129 179
130 180
131 181
132 182
133 183
134 184
135 LEDRST_EXEC LEDRST_EXEC 185
136 186
137 187
138 188
139 XCBR_OPCNT0 XCBR_OPCNT0 189
140 190
141 191
142 192
143 193
144 194
145 195
146 196
147 197
148 198
149 199
150 HEALTH HEALTH 200 MOD_001 IEC-MODE_001

 117 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


201 MOD_002 IEC-MODE_002 251 MOD_052 IEC-MODE_052
202 MOD_003 IEC-MODE_003 252 MOD_053 IEC-MODE_053
203 MOD_004 IEC-MODE_004 253 MOD_054 IEC-MODE_054
204 MOD_005 IEC-MODE_005 254 MOD_055 IEC-MODE_055
205 MOD_006 IEC-MODE_006 255 MOD_056 IEC-MODE_056
206 MOD_007 IEC-MODE_007 256 MOD_057 IEC-MODE_057
207 MOD_008 IEC-MODE_008 257 MOD_058 IEC-MODE_058
208 MOD_009 IEC-MODE_009 258 MOD_059 IEC-MODE_059
209 MOD_010 IEC-MODE_010 259 MOD_060 IEC-MODE_060
210 MOD_011 IEC-MODE_011 260 MOD_061 IEC-MODE_061
211 MOD_012 IEC-MODE_012 261 MOD_062 IEC-MODE_062
212 MOD_013 IEC-MODE_013 262 MOD_063 IEC-MODE_063
213 MOD_014 IEC-MODE_014 263 MOD_064 IEC-MODE_064
214 MOD_015 IEC-MODE_015 264 MOD_065 IEC-MODE_065
215 MOD_016 IEC-MODE_016 265 MOD_066 IEC-MODE_066
216 MOD_017 IEC-MODE_017 266 MOD_067 IEC-MODE_067
217 MOD_018 IEC-MODE_018 267 MOD_068 IEC-MODE_068
218 MOD_019 IEC-MODE_019 268 MOD_069 IEC-MODE_069
219 MOD_020 IEC-MODE_020 269 MOD_070 IEC-MODE_070
220 MOD_021 IEC-MODE_021 270 MOD_071 IEC-MODE_071
221 MOD_022 IEC-MODE_022 271 MOD_072 IEC-MODE_072
222 MOD_023 IEC-MODE_023 272 MOD_073 IEC-MODE_073
223 MOD_024 IEC-MODE_024 273 MOD_074 IEC-MODE_074
224 MOD_025 IEC-MODE_025 274 MOD_075 IEC-MODE_075
225 MOD_026 IEC-MODE_026 275 MOD_076 IEC-MODE_076
226 MOD_027 IEC-MODE_027 276 MOD_077 IEC-MODE_077
227 MOD_028 IEC-MODE_028 277 MOD_078 IEC-MODE_078
228 MOD_029 IEC-MODE_029 278 MOD_079 IEC-MODE_079
229 MOD_030 IEC-MODE_030 279 MOD_080 IEC-MODE_080
230 MOD_031 IEC-MODE_031 280 MOD_081 IEC-MODE_081
231 MOD_032 IEC-MODE_032 281 MOD_082 IEC-MODE_082
232 MOD_033 IEC-MODE_033 282 MOD_083 IEC-MODE_083
233 MOD_034 IEC-MODE_034 283 MOD_084 IEC-MODE_084
234 MOD_035 IEC-MODE_035 284 MOD_085 IEC-MODE_085
235 MOD_036 IEC-MODE_036 285 MOD_086 IEC-MODE_086
236 MOD_037 IEC-MODE_037 286 MOD_087 IEC-MODE_087
237 MOD_038 IEC-MODE_038 287 MOD_088 IEC-MODE_088
238 MOD_039 IEC-MODE_039 288 MOD_089 IEC-MODE_089
239 MOD_040 IEC-MODE_040 289 MOD_090 IEC-MODE_090
240 MOD_041 IEC-MODE_041 290 MOD_091 IEC-MODE_091
241 MOD_042 IEC-MODE_042 291 MOD_092 IEC-MODE_092
242 MOD_043 IEC-MODE_043 292 MOD_093 IEC-MODE_093
243 MOD_044 IEC-MODE_044 293 MOD_094 IEC-MODE_094
244 MOD_045 IEC-MODE_045 294 MOD_095 IEC-MODE_095
245 MOD_046 IEC-MODE_046 295 MOD_096 IEC-MODE_096
246 MOD_047 IEC-MODE_047 296 MOD_097 IEC-MODE_097
247 MOD_048 IEC-MODE_048 297 MOD_098 IEC-MODE_098
248 MOD_049 IEC-MODE_049 298 MOD_099 IEC-MODE_099
249 MOD_050 IEC-MODE_050 299 MOD_100 IEC-MODE_100
250 MOD_051 IEC-MODE_051 300 BEH_001 IEC-Behavier_001

 118 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


301 BEH_002 IEC-Behavier_002 351 BEH_052 IEC-Behavier_052
302 BEH_003 IEC-Behavier_003 352 BEH_053 IEC-Behavier_053
303 BEH_004 IEC-Behavier_004 353 BEH_054 IEC-Behavier_054
304 BEH_005 IEC-Behavier_005 354 BEH_055 IEC-Behavier_055
305 BEH_006 IEC-Behavier_006 355 BEH_056 IEC-Behavier_056
306 BEH_007 IEC-Behavier_007 356 BEH_057 IEC-Behavier_057
307 BEH_008 IEC-Behavier_008 357 BEH_058 IEC-Behavier_058
308 BEH_009 IEC-Behavier_009 358 BEH_059 IEC-Behavier_059
309 BEH_010 IEC-Behavier_010 359 BEH_060 IEC-Behavier_060
310 BEH_011 IEC-Behavier_011 360 BEH_061 IEC-Behavier_061
311 BEH_012 IEC-Behavier_012 361 BEH_062 IEC-Behavier_062
312 BEH_013 IEC-Behavier_013 362 BEH_063 IEC-Behavier_063
313 BEH_014 IEC-Behavier_014 363 BEH_064 IEC-Behavier_064
314 BEH_015 IEC-Behavier_015 364 BEH_065 IEC-Behavier_065
315 BEH_016 IEC-Behavier_016 365 BEH_066 IEC-Behavier_066
316 BEH_017 IEC-Behavier_017 366 BEH_067 IEC-Behavier_067
317 BEH_018 IEC-Behavier_018 367 BEH_068 IEC-Behavier_068
318 BEH_019 IEC-Behavier_019 368 BEH_069 IEC-Behavier_069
319 BEH_020 IEC-Behavier_020 369 BEH_070 IEC-Behavier_070
320 BEH_021 IEC-Behavier_021 370 BEH_071 IEC-Behavier_071
321 BEH_022 IEC-Behavier_022 371 BEH_072 IEC-Behavier_072
322 BEH_023 IEC-Behavier_023 372 BEH_073 IEC-Behavier_073
323 BEH_024 IEC-Behavier_024 373 BEH_074 IEC-Behavier_074
324 BEH_025 IEC-Behavier_025 374 BEH_075 IEC-Behavier_075
325 BEH_026 IEC-Behavier_026 375 BEH_076 IEC-Behavier_076
326 BEH_027 IEC-Behavier_027 376 BEH_077 IEC-Behavier_077
327 BEH_028 IEC-Behavier_028 377 BEH_078 IEC-Behavier_078
328 BEH_029 IEC-Behavier_029 378 BEH_079 IEC-Behavier_079
329 BEH_030 IEC-Behavier_030 379 BEH_080 IEC-Behavier_080
330 BEH_031 IEC-Behavier_031 380 BEH_081 IEC-Behavier_081
331 BEH_032 IEC-Behavier_032 381 BEH_082 IEC-Behavier_082
332 BEH_033 IEC-Behavier_033 382 BEH_083 IEC-Behavier_083
333 BEH_034 IEC-Behavier_034 383 BEH_084 IEC-Behavier_084
334 BEH_035 IEC-Behavier_035 384 BEH_085 IEC-Behavier_085
335 BEH_036 IEC-Behavier_036 385 BEH_086 IEC-Behavier_086
336 BEH_037 IEC-Behavier_037 386 BEH_087 IEC-Behavier_087
337 BEH_038 IEC-Behavier_038 387 BEH_088 IEC-Behavier_088
338 BEH_039 IEC-Behavier_039 388 BEH_089 IEC-Behavier_089
339 BEH_040 IEC-Behavier_040 389 BEH_090 IEC-Behavier_090
340 BEH_041 IEC-Behavier_041 390 BEH_091 IEC-Behavier_091
341 BEH_042 IEC-Behavier_042 391 BEH_092 IEC-Behavier_092
342 BEH_043 IEC-Behavier_043 392 BEH_093 IEC-Behavier_093
343 BEH_044 IEC-Behavier_044 393 BEH_094 IEC-Behavier_094
344 BEH_045 IEC-Behavier_045 394 BEH_095 IEC-Behavier_095
345 BEH_046 IEC-Behavier_046 395 BEH_096 IEC-Behavier_096
346 BEH_047 IEC-Behavier_047 396 BEH_097 IEC-Behavier_097
347 BEH_048 IEC-Behavier_048 397 BEH_098 IEC-Behavier_098
348 BEH_049 IEC-Behavier_049 398 BEH_099 IEC-Behavier_099
349 BEH_050 IEC-Behavier_050 399 BEH_100 IEC-Behavier_100
350 BEH_051 IEC-Behavier_051 400 Const0 Const0

 119 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


401 Const1 Const1 451
402 Const2 Const2 452
403 Const3 Const3 453
404 Const4 Const4 454
405 Const5 Const5 455
406 456
407 457
408 458
409 459
410 460
411 461
412 462
413 463
414 464
415 465
416 466
417 467
418 468
419 469
420 470
421 471
422 472
423 473
424 474
425 475
426 476
427 477
428 478
429 479
430 480
431 481
432 482
433 483
434 484
435 485
436 486
437 487
438 488
439 489
440 490
441 491
442 492
443 493
444 494
445 495
446 496
447 497
448 498
449 499
450

 120 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Control Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS


0 LEDRST_SIG LED Reset
1 LEDRST_ORCAT Control - LED Reset Originator category
2 LEDRST_ORID Control - LED Reset Originator category
3 LEDRST_ORCAT_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category
4 LEDRST_ORID_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category
5 RESERVE Reserve
6 RESERVE Reserve
7 RESERVE Reserve
8 RESERVE Reserve
9 RESERVE Reserve
10 MOD_CHECK MOD_CHECK
11 MOD_CTLNUM MOD_CTLNUM
12 MOD_CTLVAL MOD_CTLVAL
13 MOD_ORCAT MOD_ORCAT
14 MOD_ORIDENT MOD_ORIDENT
15 MOD_TEST MOD_TEST
16 MOD_CTLMDL MOD_CTLMDL
17 MOD_ST_ORCAT MOD_ST_ORCAT
18 MOD_ST_ORIDENT MOD_ST_ORIDENT
19 MOD_SELECT MOD_SELECT
20 MOD_SBOTIMEOUT MOD_SBOTIMEOUT
21 MOD_SBOCLASS MOD_SBOCLASS

 121 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 122 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List

 123 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Setting Default Setting


Device Range Unit Contents 101 201
Name Setting Signal Name Setting Signal Name
BO1 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 27 VD_ERR 24 VD_ERR-A
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
BO2 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 27 VD_ERR 25 VD_ERR-B
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
BO3 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 27 VD_ERR 26 VD_ERR-C
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
BO4 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 21 DIF_TRIP-A
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
BO5 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 22 DIF_TRIP-B
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
BO6 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 23 DIF_TRIP-C
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --

 124 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Setting Def ault Setting


Dev ice Range Unit Contents 101 201
Name Setting Signal Name Setting Signal Name
HBO1 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 28 DIF_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
HBO2 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 28 DIF_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
HBO3 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 28 DIF_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
HBO4 Logic OR - AND - Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat - Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 - Output signal 28 DIF_TRIP 28 DIF_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --

 125 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 126 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation Instruction

 127 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Test

/1 Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter

/2 F.record /3 F.record /4 F.record #1


Display 16/Oct/1997
Clear #1 16/Oct/1997
Refer to Section 18:13:57.031
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N

/2 E.record /3 E.record
Display
Clear 16/Oct/1997
Refer to Section Ext. trip A On
4.2.3.2.

Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N

/2 D.record /3 D.record
Display
Clear #1 16/Oct/1997
Refer to Section 18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.

Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N

/2 Counter /3 D.record
Display
Clear Trips
Refer to Section Clear Trips?
4.2.3.3. END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1

 128 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0
a-1

/1 Status /2 Metering
Metering Vda ***.* V
Binary I/O
/2 Binary I/O
Relay element
IP [00000000 ]
Time sync.
Clock adjust. /2 Ry element
LCD contrast [000 000 ]
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Inact

/2 12/Nov/1999
22:56:19 [L]

/2 LCD contrast

/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P Refer to Section 4.2.5
LED
/2 Version GRB150-201D-20
Relay type -B0
Serial No.
Software 

/2 Description
G*****-**-*
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
: /3 Addr./Param.

/2 Comms
Addr./Param. /3 Switch
Switch
a-1, b-1

 129 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0
a-1 b-1

/2 Record /3 E.record /4 Signal No.


E.record Signal No.
D.record Event name /4 Event name
Counter

/3 D.record /4 Time/starter
Time/starter Time 2.0s
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Signal name
Signal name

/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Time sync.
Time sync.
Time zone
/3 Time zone
/2 Act. gp. =* GMT +9hrs
Group1
Group2
:
Group8

/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip

/4 Parameter 
Line name 
/4 Trip /5 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/5 Prot.element
/3 Group2 DIF 10V
Parameter

/3 Group4
Parameter
a-1 b-1

 130 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0
a-1 b-1

/2 Binary I/P /3 Timers


Timers
Functions
/3 Functions

/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, I
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1005

HBO4TBO 0.20s

/2 LED /3 LED
LED LED1 AND, I
Virtual LED
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND*
IND1 BIT1 I, 1000
IND2
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description
: Password trap
Comms
Password [_ ]
Record
1234567890
Status
Protection : Confirmation trap

Binary I/O Change settings?


ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
Binary O/P
LED

Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
1234567890 1234567890
Refer to Section
4.2.6.2.

/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Alarm1 Text
ABCDEFG
:
Refer to Section
a-1 b-2 4.2.6.3.

 131 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0
a-1 b-2
/3 Addr./Param.
/2 Comms
Addr./Param.
Switch /3 Switch
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.

/2 Record /3 E.record
E.record
D.record BITRN
Counter 100 _
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5. EV128
3128 _ /4 Time/Starter
/3 D.record
Time/Starter
Scheme sw /4 Scheme sw
Binary sig.

/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Time sync.
Time sync.
Time zone
/3 Time zone
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set. Refer to Section
Copy gp. 4.2.6.7.

/3 Change act.
gp.

/3 Act gp.=1
Group1
Group2
:
Group8

a-1 b-2 c-1 d-1

 132 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0
a-1 b-2 c-1 d-1

/4 Group*
Parameter
Trip

/5 Parameter _
Line name ABCDEFG

/5 Trip /6 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Prot.element VDCHK 1 _
Off/On
SVCNT 0 _
ALM&BLK/ALM
IND.R 1 _
Off/On
CLEN 0 _
Off/N-CL/CL

/6 Prot.element

DIF V
10 _
DIFSV V
/4 Group2 5 _
Parameter TVDSV s
0.50 _
/4 Group4 DIFCC
Parameter 1.00 _
TCLP s
/3 Copy A to B 0.01 _
TCLE s
A _ 0.00 _
B _ TCLR s
0.00 _

/2 Binary I/P /3 BI /4 Timers


BI1 Timers
: Functions
BI8 /4 Functions

Refer to Section
4.2.6.8.

a-1, b-2

 133 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

a-1, b-2
/4 Logic/Reset
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO
BO1 Logic/Reset
Logic 0 _
BO2 Functions OR/AND
: Reset 0 _
HBO4 Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.
/4 Functions

In #1
/2 LED 1000 _
LED :
Virtual LED TBO s
Refer to Section 0.20 _
4.2.6.10.

/3 LED /4 LED /5 Logic/Reset


LED1 Logic/Reset
LED2 Functions Logic 0 _
: OR/AND
LED6 Reset 0 _
Ins/Lat

/5 Functions

In #1
1000 _
:
In #4
1003 _

/3 Virtual LED /4 LED /5 Logic/Reset


IND1 Logic/Reset
IND2 Functions Reset 0 _
Ins/Lat

/5 Functions

BIT1
1000 _
:
a-1,
BIT8
1007_

 134 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

a-1,

/1 Test /2 Switch
Switch
Binary O/P A.M.F. 1 _
Logic circuit Off/On
Refer to Section 4.2.7. CLPTST 0
Off/N-CL/CL
: Password trap IECTST 0
Password [_ ] Off/On
1234567890
/2 Binary O/P Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1 0 _
Disable/Enable

FAIL 0 _
Disable/Enable

/2 Logic
circuit
TermA
1 _
TermB
100 _

 135 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION


1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN

1=RECORD
MANUAL
MODE 1=FAULT RECORD

2=EVENT RECORD

NORMAL 3=DISTURBANCE RECORD


(DISPLAY OFF)

PRESS ANY
BUTTON MENU
EXCEPT FOR 2=STATUS
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON )
"RESET"
1=METERING

2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT

METERING AUTO- 3=RELAY ELELMENT


(DISPLAY ON)
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE

TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT


ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)

1=RELAY VERSION

2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT * AUTO-
(DISPLAY ON) 3=RSM COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
RELAY 4=RECORD
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT

8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISION *
9=LED
(DISPLAY ON)
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH

2=BINARY
OUTPUT
3=LOGIC CIRCUIT

 136 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix E
Outline of GRB150 and EB-101, -102
 Case Type of GRB150: Flush Mount Type
 EB-101 and EB-102

 137 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM

25 8
RESET

A B 0V CAN
CEL ENTER

END

15.6 185.2 32
104
Side view
Front view
4 holes-5.5
4 holes-4.5

TB3 OPT R
TB1 T
TB3
TB1

TB2
TB2

24 9
23 9
T1
F1
R
T

E E

Rear view for 56


Rear view for
RS485 + 100BASE-TX Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX 102

Panel cut-out
TB3
TB1
A1 B1 Terminal Application
1 2
3 4 TB3: A1 – A3 RS485 I/F
5 6 TB3: B1 – B2 IRIG-B
7 8 OPT Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103
T1 100BASE-TX
TB2
A1 B1 F1 100BASE-FX

TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal (M3.5 Ring)


T1: RJ45

A10 B10 OPT: ST connector


F1: SC connector
A18 B18

Terminal block

Case Outline of GRB150-xxxD: Flush Mount Type

 138 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

M4 Ring
terminal
TB1
1
205 226.5

Terminal block
Top view
6-5.5 for mounting

TB1

70

225
70

42.5

214.4
234
252

Front view Side view

(a) EB-101

M4 Ring
M4 Ring terminal
terminal TB2
TB1 1
1

205 226.5

8
12

Top view Terminal block


6-5.5 for mounting

TB2
TB1

70

225
70

42.5

362.4
382
400
Front view Side view

(b) EB-102
Note: When mounting varistor units longitudinally, the TB1 should be located in the down side.

Outline of varistor unit

 139 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 140 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix F
External Connection

 141 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

GRB150-101D

EB-101
TB3-
TB1 -1 TB1 -4 TB1 -1 A4
(+)
-2 (1) HBO1 B4
TB1 -2 TB1 -5
A5
TB1 -8 (+)
(1) HBO2
B5

FRAME EARTH A6
(+)
(1) HBO3
B6

A8
(+)
(1) HBO4 B8

TB3-
A10
BO1
B10

A11
BO2
B11

(P) A12
TB2- BO3
A1 B12
BI1 COMMAND BI1
B1
A13
BI2 COMMAND A2
1
B2 BI2 BO4 B13
BI3 COMMAND A3
BI3 A14
B3
A4 BO5
BI4 COMMAND BI4 B14
B4
A5 A15
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5 BO6
A6 B15
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6
A7 B17
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7
FAIL A17
A8 A18
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
B18

(N)

RELAY FAIL. TB3-A2


≥1 COM-A
DD FAIL.
TB2- A9 +5Vdc A1
DC (+) COM-B
DC-DC RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
(-) B9
0V A3
COM-0V

A10 Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)


SUPPLY (2) B10
OPT T
R
FRAME EARTH
E TX Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)
CASE EARTH
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)
FX

TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B

(1) HBO1 to HBO4: High-speed relay


(2) These connections are connected by
short-bars before shipment.

Note: In AC circuit wiring, the wires of the relay side should be separated from these of the CT side to
avoid the influence of noise.

External connection of Model 101

 142 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

GRB150-201D

BUSBAR TB3-
A4
(+)
(1) HBO1 B4
EB-102 TB1-
A-phase 1 A5 (+)
TB1-1 TB2-1
TB1-2 TB2-2 2 (1) HBO2
B5
B-phase 3
A6
TB1-3 TB2-3 (+)
TB1-4 TB2-4 4 (1) HBO3
B6
C-phase 5
TB1-5 TB2-5 A8
(+)
TB1-6 TB2-6 6
(1) HBO4 B8
TB1-8
FAn FA1 TB3-
A10
FRAME EARTH
BO1
B10

A11
BO2
B11

(P) A12
TB2- BO3
A1 B12
BI1 COMMAND BI1
B1
A13
BI2 COMMAND A2
1
B2 BI2 BO4 B13
BI3 COMMAND A3
B3 BI3 A14
A4 BO5
BI4 COMMAND BI4 B14
B4
A5 A15
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5 BO6
A6 B15
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6
A7 B17
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7
FAIL A17
A8 A18
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
B18

(N)

RELAY FAIL.
≥1
TB3-A2
DD FAIL. COM-A
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+) A1
DC-DC COM-B
(-) B9
0V RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
A3
COM-0V
A10
SUPPLY (2) B10 T Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
OPT
FRAME EARTH R

E
CASE EARTH TX Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)


FX

TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B

(1) HBO1 to HBO4: High-speed relay


(2) These connections are connected by
short-bars before shipment.

Note: In AC circuit wiring, the wires of the relay side should be separated from these of the CT side to
avoid the influence of noise.

External connection of Model 201

 143 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 144 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix G
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Busbar parameters
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet

 145 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Relay Setting Sheets

1. Relay Identification Date:


Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC voltage
DC supply voltage
Password
Active setting group

2. Busbar parameters
CT ratio

3. Contacts setting
(1) BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
HBO1
HBO2
HBO3
HBO4

 146 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4. Relay setting sheet


Def ault Setting of Relay Series
Range
№ Setting Dev ice Name Units Contents World wide
101 201
1 Activ e group 1-8 - Activ e setting group 1
2 Line name Specif ied by user - Line name no-name
3 VDCHK Of f - On - Vd check use or not On
4 SVCNT ALM&BLK - ALM - Superv isor control ALM&BLK
5 CLEN Of f - F1 - F2 - Cold Load Protection Of f
6 DIF 10 - 600 V Dif f erential relay 100
7 DIFSV 5 - 100 V Dif f erential relay f or superv isor 50
8 TVDSV 0.10 - 60.00 s VD err timer 0.50
9 DIFCC 1.00 - 10.00 - DIF setting coef f icient in CLP mode. 1.00
10 TCLP 0.01 - 100.00 s Cold load duration timer. 0.01
11 TCLE 0.00 - 100.00 s Cold load enable timer. 0.00
12 TCLR 0.00 - 100.00 s Cold load reset timer. 0.00
13 BI1 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
14 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
15 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
16 BI2 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
17 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
18 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
19 BI3 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
20 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
21 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
22 BI4 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
23 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
24 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
25 BI5 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
26 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
27 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
28 BI6 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
29 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
30 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
31 BI7 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
32 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
33 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
34 BI8 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
35 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-of f delay 0.00
36 SNS Norm - Inv - Binary Input Sense Norm
37 LED1 Logic OR - AND - LED1 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
38 Reset Inst - Latch - LED1 Reset operation Inst
39 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED1 Functions 0
40 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
41 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
42 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
43 LED2 Logic OR - AND - LED2 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
44 Reset Inst - Latch - LED2 Reset operation Inst
45 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED2 Functions 0
46 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
47 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
48 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
49 LED3 Logic OR - AND - LED3 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
50 Reset Inst - Latch - LED3 Reset operation Inst
51 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED3 Functions 0
52 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
53 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
54 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
55 LED4 Logic OR - AND - LED4 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
56 Reset Inst - Latch - LED4 Reset operation Inst
57 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED4 Functions 0
58 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
59 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
60 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
61 LED5 Logic OR - AND - LED5 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
62 Reset Inst - Latch - LED5 Reset operation Inst
63 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED5 Functions 0
64 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
65 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
66 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
67 LED6 Logic OR - AND - LED6 Logic Gate Ty pe OR
68 Reset Inst - Latch - LED6 Reset operation Inst
69 In #1 0 - 3071 - LED6 Functions 0
70 In #2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
71 In #3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
72 In #4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0

 147 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Default Setting of Relay Series


Range
№ Setting Device Name Units Contents World wide
101 201
73 IND1 Reset Inst - Latch - Virtual LED1 Reset operation Inst
74 BIT1 0 - 3071 - Virtual LED1 Functions 0
75 BIT2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
76 BIT3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
77 BIT4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
78 BIT5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
79 BIT6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
80 BIT7 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
81 BIT8 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
82 IND2 Reset Inst - Latch - Virtual LED2 Reset operation Inst
83 BIT1 0 - 3071 - Virtual LED2 Functions 0
84 BIT2 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
85 BIT3 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
86 BIT4 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
87 BIT5 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
88 BIT6 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
89 BIT7 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
90 BIT8 0 - 3071 - ditto 0
91 Plant name Specified by user - Plant name no-name
92 Description ditto - Memorandum for user no-data
93 Alarm1 Text Specified by user - Alarm1 Text ALARM1
94 Alarm2 Text Specified by user - Alarm2 Text ALARM2
95 Alarm3 Text Specified by user - Alarm3 Text ALARM3
96 Alarm4 Text Specified by user - Alarm4 Text ALARM4
97 IEC(注) 0 - 254 - Station address for IEC103 2
98 SYADJ -9999 - 9999 ms Time sync. Compensation 0
99 IP1-1 0 - 254 - CH1 IP address 192
100 IP1-2 0 - 254 - 168
101 IP1-3 0 - 254 - 19
102 IP1-4 0 - 254 - 172
103 SM1-1 0 - 255 - CH1 Subnet mask 255
104 SM1-2 0 - 255 - 255
105 SM1-3 0 - 255 - 255
106 SM1-4 0 - 255 - 0
107 GW1-1 0 - 254 - CH1 Gateway 192
108 GW1-2 0 - 254 - 168
109 GW1-3 0 - 254 - 19
110 GW1-4 0 - 254 - 1
111 IP2-1 0 - 254 - IP Address of CH#2 192
112 IP2-2 0 - 254 - 168
113 IP2-3 0 - 254 - 19
114 IP2-4 0 - 254 - 173
115 SM2-1 0 - 255 - Subnet Mask of CH#2 255
116 SM2-2 0 - 255 - 255
117 SM2-3 0 - 255 - 255
118 SM2-4 0 - 255 - 0
119 GW2-1 0 - 254 - Gateway Address of CH#2 192
120 GW2-2 0 - 254 - 168
121 GW2-3 0 - 254 - 19
122 GW2-4 0 - 254 - 1
123 SI1-1 0 - 254 - SNTP Server1 Address 0
124 SI1-2 0 - 254 - 0
125 SI1-3 0 - 254 - 0
126 SI1-4 0 - 254 - 0
127 SI2-1 0 - 254 - SNTP Server2 Address 0
128 SI2-2 0 - 254 - 0
129 SI2-3 0 - 254 - 0
130 SI2-4 0 - 254 - 0
131 SI3-1 0 - 254 - SNTP Server3 Address 0
132 SI3-2 0 - 254 - 0
133 SI3-3 0 - 254 - 0
134 SI3-4 0 - 254 - 0
135 SI4-1 0 - 254 - SNTP Server4 Address 0
136 SI4-2 0 - 254 - 0
137 SI4-3 0 - 254 - 0
138 SI4-4 0 - 254 - 0
139 SMODE 0-1 - 0
140 DEADT 1 - 120 min TCP KeepAlive Time 120
141 GOINT 1 - 60 s 60

 148 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Default Setting of Relay Series


Range
№ Setting Device Name Units Contents World wide
101 201
142 PG1-1 0 - 254 - Ping check addrs port#1 0
143 PG1-2 0 - 254 - 0
144 PG1-3 0 - 254 - 0
145 PG1-4 0 - 254 - 0
146 PG2-1 0 - 254 - Ping check addrs port#2 0
147 PG2-2 0 - 254 - 0
148 PG2-3 0 - 254 - 0
149 PG2-4 0 - 254 - 0
150 232C 9.6 - 19.2 - 57.6 - RS-232C baud rate 9.6
151 IECBR 9.6 - 19.2 - IEC103 baud rate 19.2
152 IECBLK Normal - Blocked - Monitor direction blocked Normal
153 850BLK Normal - Blocked - IEC61850 Block Normal
154 850AUT Off - On - IEC61850 Authorize Off
155 TSTMOD Off - On - IEC61850 Test mode Off
156 GSECHK Off - On - GOOSE receive check Off
157 PINGCHK Off - On - Ping check Off
158 BITRN 0 - 128 - Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events 100
159 Time 0.1 - 5.0 s Disturbance record 2.0
160 TRIP Off - On - Disturbance record trigger use or not On
161 Vd err Off - On - ditto On
162 TCSPEN Off - On - Opt-On - Trip Circuit Supervision Enable Off
163 CBSMEN Off - On - CB condition super visor enable Off
164 TCAEN Off - On - Trip CounterAlarm Enable Off
165 TCALM 1 - 10000 - Trip Count Alarm Threshold 10000
166 Time sync Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN - Time sync. Of
167 GMT -12 - +12 hrs Time 0
168 GMTm -59 - +59 min Time 0

 149 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

5. PLC default setting

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1536 DIF_BLOCK
1537 DIFSV_BLOCK
1538 CB_FOR_CLP X [769]BI2_COMMAND X
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610

 150 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632 TC_FAIL
1633 CB_N/O_CONT
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639 IND.RESET X [768]BI1_COMMAND X
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667 TP_COUNT X [28]DIF_TRIP X
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685

 151 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760

 152 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835

 153 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910

 154 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985

 155 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060

 156 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135

 157 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210

 158 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285

 159 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360

 160 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435

 161 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510

 162 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1
2561 DISP.ALARM2
2562 DISP.ALARM3
2563 DISP.ALARM4
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585

 163 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642 SET.GROUP3
2643 SET.GROUP4
2644 SET.GROUP5
2645 SET.GROUP6
2646 SET.GROUP7
2647 SET.GROUP8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1
2657 CON_TPMD2
2658 CON_TPMD3
2659 CON_TPMD4
2660 CON_TPMD5

 164 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2661 CON_TPMD6
2662 CON_TPMD7
2663 CON_TPMD8
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735

 165 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810

 166 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070

 167 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145

 168 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220

 169 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop


Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256

 170 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

6. Evente record setting


Event record
Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type
Signal No. Signal Name 101D 201D
1 EV1 0 - 3071 - Event record signal 768 BI1 command x On/Off
2 EV2 0 - 3071 - ditto 769 BI2 command x On/Off
3 EV3 0 - 3071 - ditto 770 BI3 command x On/Off
4 EV4 0 - 3071 - ditto 771 BI4 command x On/Off
5 EV5 0 - 3071 - ditto 772 BI5 command x On/Off
6 EV6 0 - 3071 - ditto 773 BI6 command x On/Off
7 EV7 0 - 3071 - ditto 774 BI7 command x On/Off
8 EV8 0 - 3071 - ditto 775 BI8 command x On/Off
9 EV9 0 - 3071 - ditto 1639 Ind reset x On/Off
10 EV10 0 - 3071 - ditto 28 Trip x On/Off
11 EV11 0 - 3071 - ditto 10 Cold load x On/Off
12 EV12 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
13 EV13 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
14 EV14 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
15 EV15 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
16 EV16 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
17 EV17 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
18 EV18 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
19 EV19 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
20 EV20 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
21 EV21 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
22 EV22 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
23 EV23 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
24 EV24 0 - 3071 - ditto 1251 Relay fail x On/Off
25 EV25 0 - 3071 - ditto 27 Vd err x On/Off
26 EV26 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
27 EV27 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
28 EV28 0 - 3071 - ditto 1270 TCSV x On/Off
29 EV29 0 - 3071 - ditto 1271 CBSV x On/Off
30 EV30 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
31 EV31 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
32 EV32 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
33 EV33 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
34 EV34 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
35 EV35 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
36 EV36 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
37 EV37 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
38 EV38 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
39 EV39 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
40 EV40 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
41 EV41 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
42 EV42 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
43 EV43 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
44 EV44 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
45 EV45 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
46 EV46 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
47 EV47 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
48 EV48 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
49 EV49 0 - 3071 - ditto 1258 Ry fail-A x On/Off
50 EV50 0 - 3071 - ditto 1438 Data lost x On/Off
51 EV51 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
52 EV52 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
53 EV53 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
54 EV54 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
55 EV55 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
56 EV56 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
57 EV57 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
58 EV58 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
59 EV59 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
60 EV60 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
61 EV61 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
62 EV62 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
63 EV63 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
64 EV64 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off

 171 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Event record
Default setting

No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type
Signal No. Signal Name 101D 201D
65 EV65 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
66 EV66 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
67 EV67 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
68 EV68 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
69 EV69 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
70 EV70 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
71 EV71 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
72 EV72 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
73 EV73 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
74 EV74 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
75 EV75 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
76 EV76 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
77 EV77 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
78 EV78 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
79 EV79 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
80 EV80 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
81 EV81 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
82 EV82 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
83 EV83 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
84 EV84 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
85 EV85 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
86 EV86 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
87 EV87 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
88 EV88 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
89 EV89 0 - 3071 - ditto 471 BO1 operate x On/Off
90 EV90 0 - 3071 - ditto 472 BO2 operate x On/Off
91 EV91 0 - 3071 - ditto 473 BO3 operate x On/Off
92 EV92 0 - 3071 - ditto 474 BO4 operate x On/Off
93 EV93 0 - 3071 - ditto 475 BO5 operate x On/Off
94 EV94 0 - 3071 - ditto 476 BO6 operate x On/Off
95 EV95 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
96 EV96 0 - 3071 - ditto 487 HBO1 operate x On/Off
97 EV97 0 - 3071 - ditto 488 HBO2 operate x On/Off
98 EV98 0 - 3071 - ditto 489 HBO3 operate x On/Off
99 EV99 0 - 3071 - ditto 490 HBO4 operate x On/Off
100 EV100 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On/Off
101 EV101 0 - 3071 - ditto 2640 SET.GROUP1 x On
102 EV102 0 - 3071 - ditto 2641 SET.GROUP2 x On
103 EV103 0 - 3071 - ditto 2642 SET.GROUP3 x On
104 EV104 0 - 3071 - ditto 2643 SET.GROUP4 x On
105 EV105 0 - 3071 - ditto 2644 SET.GROUP5 x On
106 EV106 0 - 3071 - ditto 2645 SET.GROUP6 x On
107 EV107 0 - 3071 - ditto 2646 SET.GROUP7 x On
108 EV108 0 - 3071 - ditto 2647 SET.GROUP8 x On
109 EV109 0 - 3071 - ditto 1448 Sys. change x On
110 EV110 0 - 3071 - ditto 1449 Rly. change x On
111 EV111 0 - 3071 - ditto 1450 Grp. change x On
112 EV112 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
113 EV113 0 - 3071 - ditto 1272 TC alarm x On
114 EV114 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
115 EV115 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
116 EV116 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
117 EV117 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
118 EV118 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
119 EV119 0 - 3071 - ditto 1445 PLC data CHG x On
120 EV120 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
121 EV121 0 - 3071 - ditto 1409 LED RST x On
122 EV122 0 - 3071 - ditto 1435 F.record_CLR x On
123 EV123 0 - 3071 - ditto 1436 E.record_CLR x On
124 EV124 0 - 3071 - ditto 1437 D.record_CLR x On
125 EV125 0 - 3071 - ditto 1439 TP_COUNT_CLR x On
126 EV126 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
127 EV127 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On
128 EV128 0 - 3071 - ditto 0 On

 172 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

7. Disturbance record setting


Setting Device Name Default Setting of Relay Series
No. Signal No. Signal Name Contents World wide 101 World wide 201
Range Signal No. Signal Name Signal No. Signal Name
1 SIG1 0 - 3071 Signal name1 Disturbance record signal 11 DIF 11 DIF-A
2 SIG2 0 - 3071 Signal name2 ditto 0 NA 12 DIF-B
3 SIG3 0 - 3071 Signal name3 ditto 0 NA 13 DIF-C
4 SIG4 0 - 3071 Signal name4 ditto 14 DIFSV 14 DIFSV-A
5 SIG5 0 - 3071 Signal name5 ditto 0 NA 15 DIFSV-B
6 SIG6 0 - 3071 Signal name6 ditto 0 NA 16 DIFSV-C
7 SIG7 0 - 3071 Signal name7 ditto 28 Trip 28 Trip
8 SIG8 0 - 3071 Signal name8 ditto 10 Cold load 10 Cold load
9 SIG9 0 - 3071 Signal name9 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
10 SIG10 0 - 3071 Signal name10 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
11 SIG11 0 - 3071 Signal name11 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
12 SIG12 0 - 3071 Signal name12 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
13 SIG13 0 - 3071 Signal name13 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
14 SIG14 0 - 3071 Signal name14 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
15 SIG15 0 - 3071 Signal name15 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
16 SIG16 0 - 3071 Signal name16 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
17 SIG17 0 - 3071 Signal name17 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
18 SIG18 0 - 3071 Signal name18 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
19 SIG19 0 - 3071 Signal name19 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
20 SIG20 0 - 3071 Signal name20 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
21 SIG21 0 - 3071 Signal name21 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
22 SIG22 0 - 3071 Signal name22 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
23 SIG23 0 - 3071 Signal name23 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
24 SIG24 0 - 3071 Signal name24 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
25 SIG25 0 - 3071 Signal name25 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
26 SIG26 0 - 3071 Signal name26 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
27 SIG27 0 - 3071 Signal name27 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
28 SIG28 0 - 3071 Signal name28 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
29 SIG29 0 - 3071 Signal name29 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
30 SIG30 0 - 3071 Signal name30 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
31 SIG31 0 - 3071 Signal name31 ditto 0 NA 0 NA
32 SIG32 0 - 3071 Signal name32 ditto 0 NA 0 NA

 173 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 174 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware test
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Differential element DIF test
4.2 Supervisory element DIFSV test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test

 175 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number


Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock

3. Hardware test

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit


Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

 176 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

4. Function test

4.1 Differential element DIF test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting Measured voltage

(2) Operating time test

Tap setting Test voltage Measured time

4.2 Supervisory element DIFSV test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting Measured voltage

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

Scheme Results
On load
Tripping circuit

 177 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 178 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix I
Return Repair Form

 179 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

RETURN / REPAIR FORM


Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRB150 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRB150 Model: Sub No.


(Example: Type: GRB150 Model: 201D-20-B0 )

Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:

1. Reason for returning the relay


 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the
attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .
(Example: 04/ Nov./ 1997 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:

Prefault values
Vda: V
Vdb: V
Vdc: V

 180 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Fault values
Prefault values
Vda: V
Vdb: V
Vdc: V

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4. Describe the details of the incident:

5. Date incident occurred


Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/July/1998)

6. Give any comments about the GRB150, including the documents:

 181 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Customer

Name:
Company Name:
Address:

Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:

 182 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix J
Technical Data

 183 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current 1A
Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
DC power supply 110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc)
220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc)
48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc)
AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11 maximum 12%
DC supply interruption IEC 60255-11
Permissive duration of DC supply voltage
interruption to maintain normal operation maximum 50ms at 110Vdc
Restart time less than 10s
Binary input circuit DC voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc)
220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc)
48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc)
Overload rating
AC voltage input for varistor unit EB-101 or EB-102 300V continuous
1kVrms for 0.4s
Burden
Input impedance 667 with EB-101 or -102
DC power supply less than 10W (quiescent)
less than 15W(operation)
Binary input circuit 0.5W/input at 110Vdc
High impedance differential protection
Differential protection 10 to 600V in 1V step
Supervisory 5 to 100V in 1V step
Operating time Typical 15ms
Resetting time Less than 100ms
Accuracy
Differential protection 5% at more than 50V
Supervisory 5% at more than 20V
Front Communication port - local PC (RS232)
Connection: Point to point
Cable type: Multi-core (straight)
Cable length: 15m (max.)
Connector: RS232C 9-way D-type female
Rear Communication port – remote PC
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Connection Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type Twisted pair cable with shield
Cable length 1200m (max.)
Connection Screw terminals
Isolation 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2kbps
Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Cable type Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125μm fibre
Connector ST
Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2kbps
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100: 100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX: SC connector

 184 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Time synchronization port


Connection: Screw terminals
Time code: IRIG-B (AM modulated, TTL)
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Binary Outputs (Contact ratings)
Auxiliary relay BO1 to BO6, FAIL
Ratings: Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 20A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Approx. 5ms
High-speed auxiliary relay HBO1 to HBO4
Ratings: Make and carry: 5A continuously
Make and carry: 20A, 290Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Approx. 3ms
Mechanical design
Weight 4.5kg
Case colour 2.5Y7.5/1(approximation to Munsell value)
Installation Flush mounting

 185 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10C to +55C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-3 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all
terminals and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 / EN61000-4-12 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave
Electrostatic IEC60255-22-2 Class 4, 8kV contact discharge, 15kV air discharge.
Discharge IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1GHz and 1.4GHz to 4.0GHz. Additional spot tests at 80,
Disturbance 160, 380, 450, 900, 1860 and 2150MHz.
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 / 4kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns
Disturbance EN61000-4-4 2kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns applied to com ports (RS485, etc.)
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV
RS485 port: 1kV/ -
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7, IEC61000-4-16 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance / EN61000-4-16 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC60255-25 Class A, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

 186 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

European Commission Directives


89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is demonstrated
according to EN 61000-6-2 and
EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low
Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to
EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.

 187 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 188 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

 189 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:

Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Signal number
Marked with : Signal number and name of binary input by PLC function

Signal No. Signal name


Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 1 1
Other cases 0
C

A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0

A
A B C Output
B & Output
1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0

OR gates

A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1

A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1

A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1

 190 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Signal inversion

A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0

Timer
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX

0 t Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting


XXX: Set time
XXX

t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting


XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY

0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting


XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY

One-shot timer
A
A Output

Output
XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY: Setting range


Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0

Scheme switch

A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON
Other cases 0

Switch Output
 Output
ON 1
ON
OFF 0

 191 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

 192 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix L
Setting Calculation

 193 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

1. Setting of DIF

Model circuit:
Busbar

RS1 RL1 RL2 RS2

GRB150+
CT1 ZE1 ZR ZE2 CT2
EB-101/EB-102

IFmax

Constants:

1) Resistance of CT secondary winding ............................... RS2 = 1.5 ohms

2) Resistance of secondary wiring for CT connecting lead loop – most onerous


case .................................................................................. RL2 = 1.0 ohm

3) Maximum through fault current ...................................... IFmax = 50kA

4) CT ratio ............................................................................ N = 800

5) Number of CTs connected to GRB150............................. n = 14

6) CT secondary excitation current at GRB150 setting voltage


.......................................................................................... Ie = 3mA
7) GRB150 input impedance ................................................. ZR = 667 ohms

8) CT knee-point voltage ...................................................... Vk= 1000V

9) Minimum internal fault current ........................................ IFmin = 1000A

Setting calculations :
1) Calculate voltage setting value.
VR  1.2 (RS2 + RL2)  IFmax / N
 1.2  (1.5 ohms + 1.0 ohm)  50000 / 800
 188V
2) Calculate minimum operating current value for internal fault.
Imin = (n Ie + Ir + I) N
= (n Ie + Ir + VR / ZR) N
= (14  0.003 A + 188 / 667 ohms)  800

 194 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

= 259A
Ir is neglected because it is less than 0.1 mA referring to voltage-current characteristic of
the varistor shown below.

Setting checks:
1) Check that the setting voltage value VR is smaller than half of the CT knee-point voltage
Vk .
1000 / 2 = 500 V > 188V

2) Check that the minimum internal fault current IFmin is larger than the minimum operating
current value Imin.
1000A > 259A
Note: The current sensitivity Imin can be reduced by connecting a shunt resistor across the
relay/varistor unit input. To reduce it from 259A to 400A for example, connect a
resistor of 1067 ohms[= 188V×800/(400A-259A)].

2000

1800

1600

1400
Voltage
(V) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000


Current (A)

 195 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

2. Setting of DIFSV

The setting of DIFSV is determined from the maximum erroneous voltage which is generated due
to the following two factors under normal service conditions.
• CT turns ratio errors
• Error due to differences in the respective lengths of the CT secondary connecting
leads to the paralleling point of the differential circuit

Erroneous voltage Ver1 due to CT turns ratio errors:


The maximum erroneous voltage Ver1 is given by the following equation:
Ver1 = ZR  ILmax  CTer
where,
ZR: relay impedance
ILmax: maximum load current (= rated current, for example)
CTer: maximum CT turns ratio error (= 0.25 %, for example)
Then,
Ver1 = 667 ohms  5 A  0.0025
≒8V
When the busbar is configured with parallel feeders, the maximum load current of the feeder may
increase by up to 1.8 times rated current when one of the feeders is opened.
Then,
Ver1 = 667 ohms  1.8  5 A  0.0025
≒15 V

Erroneous voltage Ver2 due to differences in the respective lengths of the CT secondary
connecting leads to the paralleling point of the differential circuit:
The maximum erroneous voltage Ver2 must not exceed (RS + RL)  ILmax for the most onerous case,
Ver2 < (RS + RL)  ILmax
< (1.5 ohms + 1.0 ohm)  5A
< 12.5 V
In a busbar configured with parallel feeders, the load current may increase transiently by up to 1.8
times when one of the parallel feeders is opened. Then assuming that the feeders are fully loaded
under normal conditions,
Ver2 < (1.5 ohms + 1.0 ohm)  1.8  5A
< 22.5 V

DIFSV should be set to satisfy the following equation:


DIFSV > Ver1 + Ver2 = 15 V + 12.5 V = 27.5 V for single feeder busbar
= 15 V + 22.5 V = 37.5 V for parallel feeder busbar
Then,

DIFSV = 30 V for single feeder busbar


= 40 V for parallel feeder busbar

 196 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and
Troubleshooting

 197 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily as
follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and operate it
according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help][Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s

2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)
- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal
number), COT
- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),
COT, Type of measurand quantities
- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of

 198 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

measurand quantities
- Common setting
 Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
 FUN of System function
 Test mode, etc.
Note: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply of the relay and
turn on again.

3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read
from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can
be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported commands
with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.4.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.5.
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.6.

3.2 List of Information


The followings are the default settings.

 199 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

List of Information
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal No. OFF ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 217 -- -- --
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 217 -- -- --
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 217 -- -- --
5 Pow er On Relay pow er on. Not supported

Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
16 Auto-recloser active Not supported
active, if impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available, this
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If
18 Protection active GI 1 1, 7, 12 217 1413 1 2
not, set to inactive.

19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 7, 11, 12 217 1409 -- 2

Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control


20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 11 217 1241 1 2
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to
21 Test mode GI 1 11 217 1242 1 2
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
event is sent to control system.

23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 217 1243 1 2

24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 217 1244 1 2

25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 217 1245 1 2

26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 217 1246 1 2

27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set


28 Auxiliary input2 Binary input 2 No set
29 Auxiliary input3 Binary input 3 No set
30 Auxiliary input4 Binary input 4 No set

Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision Not supported
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision Not supported
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision Not supported
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision Not supported
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group w arning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7 217 1258 1 2
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7 217 1252 1 2

Earth Fault Indications


48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault Not supported
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault Not supported
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault Not supported
51 Earth Fault Fw d Earth fault forw ard Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported

 200 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IEC103 Configurator Default setting


INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal NO. OFF ON
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up No set
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up No set
68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1, 7 217 28 -- 2
69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip No set
70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip No set
71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip No set
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip No set
73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location Not supported
74 Fault forw ard/line Forw ard fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported

76 Teleprotection Signal transmitted Carrier signal sending Not supported

77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported

78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported


79 Zone2 Zone 2 trip Not supported
80 Zone3 Zone 3 trip Not supported
81 Zone4 Zone 4 trip Not supported
82 Zone5 Zone 5 trip Not supported
83 Zone6 Zone 6 trip Not supported
84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up No set
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
87 Trip measuring system L2 Not supported
88 Trip measuring system L3 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip Not supported
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip Not supported
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip Not supported
93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip Not supported

Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported

 201 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IEC103 configurator Default setting


INF Description Contents Type
GI COT FUN Max. No.
ID
Measurands
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0
145 Measurand I,V <meaurand I> No 0
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q <meaurand I> No 0
147 Measurand IN,VEN <meaurand I> No 0
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Vda, Vdb, Vdc measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 217 9
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries of
241 Not supported
a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirm Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported

Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator


INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit Coeff
Lower Upper
148 (empty)
(empty)
(empty)
Vda 1 12 short 0 4096 14.5134 (*)
Vdb 1 16 short 0 4096 14.5134 (*)
Vdc 1 20 short 0 4096 14.5134 (*)
(empty)
(empty)
(empty)

(*): In default setting, when the voltage level is 63.5V, “Coeff” is calculated by the following
equation:
LSB
Coeff = (0.27V / 63.3V / 1.2)  212

 202 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IEC103 Configurator Default setting


INF Description Contents Control
Type ID COT FUN
direction

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction


System functions

0 Initiation of general interrogation -- 7 9 255

0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255

General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported
17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported
18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 217
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 217
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 217
24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 217
25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 ON 20 20 217
26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 ON 20 20 217

Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group

243 Read directory of a single entry Not supported

Read values or attributes of a


244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of generic
245 Not supported
data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execution Not supported

(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator


INF DCO
Sig off Sig on Rev Valid time
18 2686 2686 ✓ 0
19 0 2688 200
23 0 2640 1000
24 0 2641 1000
25 0 2642 1000
26 0 2643 1000

✓: signal reverse

 203 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Description Contents GRD140 supported Comment

Basic application functions


Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes

Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated value
Measurand
times
Current L1 Ia No set
Current L2 Ib No set
Current L3 Ic No set
Voltage L1-E Vda Configurable
Voltage L2-E Vdb Configurable
Voltage L3-E Vdc Configurable
Active pow er P P No set
Reactive pow er Q Q No set
Frequency f f No set
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No set

Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator


- Setting file’s remark: IGRB150DA000
- Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Measurand period [s]: 2
- Function type of System functions: 217
- Signal No. of Test mode: 1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279

 204 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)

 205 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:

(1) Naming for IEC103setting data

The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be
provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:
First draft: _01.csv
Second draft: _02.csv
Third draft: _03.csv
Revision number
The name “” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or
GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte
characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.

(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data

The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk)
or CD-R, not to remain in the folder.

 206 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation
Object Procedure
1 Communication Address setting is incorrect. BCU Match address setting between BCU and relay.
trouble RY Avoid duplication of address with other relay.
(IEC103
Transmission baud rate setting is BCU Match transmission baud rate setting between
communication incorrect. BCU and relay.
is not RY
available.) Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay
data that BCU transmits to relay is setting is fixed as following settings.
incorrect. - Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even
RS485 or optical cable interconnection Cable - Check the connection port.
is incorrect. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection of
optical cable.
The setting of converter is incorrect. Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW
(RS485/optic conversion is executed setting in reference to INSTRUCTION
with the transmission channel, etc.) MANUAL (6F2S0794).
The relationship between logical “0/1” of BCU Check the following;
the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. Logical0 : Sig.on
(In the event of using optical cable)
Logical1:Sig.off
Terminal resistor is not offered. cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends
(Especially when RS485 cable is of RS 485 cable.
long.)
Relay cannot receive the requirement BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms
frame from BCU. between receiving the reply frame from the
relay and transmitting the next requirement
(The timing coordination of sending and
frame on BCU.
receiving switch control is irregular in
half-duplex communication.)
The requirement frame from BCU and BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the
the reply frame from relay contend. relay.
(The sending and receiving timing Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable
coordination is irregular in half-duplex value of response time 50ms plus
communication.) margin)
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending condition is RY Change the event sending condition (signal
display IEC103 not valid. number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a
event on the setting error. When the setting is correct, check
SAS side. the signal condition by programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Information Number RY Match the relevant event Information Number
(INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the
SAS
may be different between the relay relay and SAS.
and SAS.

 207 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation


Object Procedure
The relay is not initialised after writing RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from
IEC103 configurator setting. the LCD screen. When differing from the sum
value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the
relay.
It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal.
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the frame of time BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.
synchronised synchronisation.
with IEC103
The settling of time synchronisation RY Change the settling of time synchronisation
communication
source is set to other than IEC. source to IEC.
.
(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay

 208 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix N
Timing Chart of Cold load Condition
Judgment

 209 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Timing Chart of Cold Load Status Judgment

(1) Function 1:
Setting: [TCLP]= should be set.
[TCLE],[TCLR]=Not applied.
From CB close command output, the cold load condition is judged for a time.
CB closing CB open

CB closing command
(“CB_FOR_CLP”)

COLD LOAD

TCLP one-shot timer

(3) Function 2:
Setting: [TCLP]=Not applied.
[TCLE],[TCLR]=should be set.
From CB contact closing, the cold load condition is judged for a time.
CB closing CB open

CB contact CLOSE

(CB_FOR_CLP) OPEN

COLD LOAD

TCLR Off-delay timer TCLE On-delay timer

 210 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix O
IEC61850: MICS & PICS

 211 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

PICS: The GRB150 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following
tables.

Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4


Logical Nodes GRB150 Nodes GRB150
L: System Logical Nodes GGIO_GOOSE Yes
LPHD Yes GSAL ---
Common Logical Node Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
LLN0 Yes IARC ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions IHMI ---
PDIF Yes ITCI ---
PDIR --- ITMI ---
PDIS --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDOP --- ANCR ---
PDUP --- ARCO ---
PFRC --- ATCC ---
PHAR --- AVCO ---
PHIZ --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PIOC --- MDIF ---
PMRI --- MHAI ---
PMSS --- MHAN ---
POPE --- MMTR ---
PPAM --- MMXN ---
PSCH --- MMXU ---
PSDE --- MSQI ---
PTEF --- MSTA ---
PTOC --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOF --- SARC ---
PTOV --- SIMG ---
PTRC Yes SIML ---
PTTR --- SPDC ---
PTUC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUV --- XCBR Yes
PUPF --- XSWI ---
PTUF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PVOC --- TCTR ---
PVPH --- TVTR ---
PZSU --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YEFN ---
RDRE --- YLTC ---
RADR --- YPSH ---
RBDR --- YPTR ---
RDRS --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system
RBRF --- equipment
RDIR --- ZAXN ---
RFLO --- ZBAT ---
RPSB --- ZCAB ---
RREC --- ZCAP ---
RSYN --- ZCON ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZGEN ---
CALH --- ZGIL ---
CCGR --- ZLIN ---
CILO --- ZMOT ---
CPOW --- ZREA ---
CSWI --- ZRRC ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZSAR ---
GAPC --- ZTCF ---
GGIO Yes ZTCR ---

 212 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3


Common data classes GRB150
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACT_ABC Yes
ACD Yes
ACD_ABC Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV Yes
SAV ---
WYE Yes
WYE_ABCN Yes
DEL Yes
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC Yes
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---

 213 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N

Common Logical Node class


Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

LLNO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y

 214 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

PDIF class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
TmAst CSD Active curve charactristic O N
Measured Values
DifAClc WYE Differential Current O Y
RstA WYE Restraint Current O N
Settings
LinCapac ASG Line capacitance (for load currents) O N
LoSet ING Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
HiSet ING High operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
RstMod ING Restraint Mode O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N

PTRC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Tr ACT_ABC Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N

Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.

 215 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

GGIO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind2 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind3 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind4 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind5 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind6 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind7 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind8 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind9 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
Ind64 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

 216 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

GGIO_GOOSE class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind2 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind3 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind4 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind5 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind6 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind7 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind8 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind9 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind11 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind12 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind13 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind14 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind15 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind16 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

 217 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

XCBR class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB150
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N

 218 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

INS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.

 219 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

ACT class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

ACT_ABC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

 220 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

ACD class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward M Y
| both
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

ACD_ABC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward M Y
| both
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13

 221 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

MV class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | O N
low-low |…
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

 222 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

CMV class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | O N
low-low |…
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

 223 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

WYE class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 N
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

WYE_ABCN class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

 224 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

DEL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsAB CMV GC_1 Y
phsBC CMV GC_1 Y
phsCA CMV GC_1 Y
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

SEQ class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
configuration, description and extension
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B|C|… O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21

 225 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

SPC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_ N
E_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M and
AC_CO_SBOW_
E_M and
AC_CO_TA_E_
M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31

 226 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

DPC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | M Y
bad-state
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31

 227 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

INC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_ N
E_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M and
AC_CO_SBOW_
E_M and
AC_CO_TA_E_
M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31

 228 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

ING class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
configuration, description and extension
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 39
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.

ASG class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 42

 229 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

DPL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 45

LPL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB150
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 AC_LN0_EX N
only;
for example "IEC
61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 45

 230 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

PICS: IEC61850 ASCI Conformance Statement


Client/ Server/ GRB150 Remarks
subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N

If Server side (B11) supported


M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y

 231 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

If GSE (B31/B32) is supported


GOOSE O O Y
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataRefInc
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O N
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y

 232 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

S27-3 data-update (dupd) N


S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O N
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.

 233 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.


c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).

PICS for A-Profile support


A-Profile Profile Description Client Server エラー! Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S リンク
が正し
くあり
ません。
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.

PICS for T-Profile support


A-Profile Profile Description Client Server エラー! Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S リンク
が正し
くあり
ません。
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.

 234 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

MMS InitiateRequest general parameters


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
InitiateRequest が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling m m m m Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initRequestDetail m m m m Y

InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

MMS InitiateResponse general parameters


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
InitiateRequest が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled m m m m Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initResponseDetail m m m m Y

InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

 235 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

MMS service supported conformance table


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
MMS service supported CBB が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
status o o o m Y
getNameList o o o c1 Y
identify o o m m Y
rename o o o o N
read o o o c2 Y
write o o o c3 Y
getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y
defineNamedVariable o o o o N
defineScatteredAccess o i o i N
getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N
deleteVariableAccess o o o o N
defineNamedVariableList o o o o N
getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y
deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N
defineNamedType o i o i N
getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N
deleteNamedType o i o i N
input o i o i N
output o i o i N
takeControl o i o i N
relinquishControl o i o i N
defineSemaphore o i o i N
deleteSemaphore o i o i N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N
downloadSegment o i o i N
terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N
initiateUploadSequence o i o i N
uploadSegment o i o i N
terminateUploadSequence o i o i N
requestDomainDownload o i o i N
requestDomainUpload o i o i N
loadDomainContent o i o i N
storeDomainContent o i o i N
deleteDomain o i o i N
getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y
createProgramInvocation o i o i N

 236 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Client-CR Server-CR エラー!


リンク
MMS service supported CBB が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m N
cancel o o o m N
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N

 237 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Client-CR Server-CR エラー!


リンク
MMS service supported CBB が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS write
service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.

MMS Parameter CBB


Client-CR Server-CR エラー! リ
ンクが正
MMS parameter CBB
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range しくあり
ません。
STR1 o o o c1 Y
STR2 o o o o N
1 1 or 1 c2 Y(10)
NEST greater
VNAM o o o c1 Y
VADR o o o o N
VALT o o o c1 Y
bit x x x x N
TPY o o o o N
VLIS o c1 o c3 Y
bit x x x x N
bit x x x x N
CEI o i o i N
ACO o c4 o c4 N
SEM o c4 o c4 N
CSR o c4 o c4 N
CSNC o c4 o c4 N
CSPLC o c4 o c4 N
CSPI o c4 o c4 N

 238 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.


c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.

GetNameList conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
GetNameList が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
ObjectClass m m m m Y
ObjectScope m m m m Y
DomainName o o m m Y
ContinueAfter o m m m Y
Response+
List Of Identifier m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y
Response-
Error Type m m m m Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.

AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement


Not applicable.

VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
VariableAccessSpecification が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
listOfVariable o o o c1 Y
variableSpecification o o o c1 Y
alternateAccess o o o c1 Y
variableListName o o o c2 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.

VariableSpecification conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
VariableSpecification が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。

 239 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

name o o o m Y
address o o o i N
variableDescription o o o i N
scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N
invalidated o x o x N

 240 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Read conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
Read が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
specificationWithResult o o o m Y
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
Response
variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y

Write conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
Write が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
listOfData m m m m Y
Response
failure m m m m Y
success m m m m Y

InformationReport conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
InformationReport が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y

GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
GetVariableAccessAttributes が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
name o o m m Y
address o o m x N

 241 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
address o x o x N
typeSpecification m m m m Y

DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement


Not applicable.

 242 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
GetNamedVariableListAttributes が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
ObjectName m m m m Y
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
listOfVariable m m m m Y
variableSpecification m m m m Y
alternateAccess o m o i N

DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement


Not applicable.

ReadJournal conformance statement


Not applicable.

JournalEntry conformance statement


Not applicable.

InitializeJournal conformance statement


Not applicable.

FileDirectory conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
FileDirectory が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
filespecification o o m m Y
continueAfter o o m m Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y

 243 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

FileOpen conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
FileOpen が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
filename m m m m Y
initialPosition o o m m Y
Response+
frsmID m m m m Y
fileAttributes m m m m Y

FileRead conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
FileRead が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+
fileData m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y

FileClose conformance statement


Client-CR Server-CR エラー!
リンク
FileClose が正し
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
くあり
ません。
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+ m m m m Y

GOOSE conformance statement


Subscriber Publisher Value/comment エラー! リン
クが正しくあ
りません。
GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y
SendGOOSEMessage m m Y
GetGoReference o c3 N
GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N
GetGoCBValues o o Y
SetGoCBValues o o Y
GSENotSupported c2 c5 N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y

 244 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.


c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.

GSSE conformance statement


Not applicable.

 245 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Appendix P
Ordering

 246 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Ordering

GRB150 D 0 0

Type:
High-impedance Differential Relay GRB150
Model:
- Single-phase protection (with EB-101) 101
8 BIs, 6 BO (*), 4 HSBO
- Three-phase protection (with EB-102) 201
8 BIs, 6 BO (*), 4 HSBO
Ratings:
50Hz, 110V/125Vdc 1
60Hz, 110V/125Vdc 2
50Hz, 220V/250Vdc 5
60Hz, 220V/250Vdc 6
50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc A
60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc B
Communications:
For IEC60870-5-103 For IEC61850 / RSM100
RS485 100BASE-TX A
RS485 100BASE-FX B
Fibre optic 100BASE-TX D
Fibre optic 100BASE-FX E

Miscellaneous:
None 0
Note
EB-101: Varistor unit for single phase
EB-102: Varistor unit for three phase
(*) BO for FAIL is excluded.

 247 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 0

Version-up Records

Version Date Revised Section Contents


No.
0.0 Feb. 3, 2010 -- First issue
1.0 Feb. 22, 2010 3.1, 3.2.3, 4.2.4.2, Modified the description (BO11-BO14 → HBO1-HBO4).
4.2.6.9, 4.2.7.2, 6.4.3
4.1.2 Modified Figure 4.1.1.
Appendices Modified Appendix C, D, F, G and J.
2.0 Apr. 7, 2010 2.2.2.1 Modified Figure 2.2.2.
2.4 Modified the description.
3.1.2 Modified Figure 3.1.2.
6.5.2, 6.6.2 Modified the description.
6.7.2 Modified Table 6.7.2.
Appendices Modified Appendix E, J and M.
3.0 Aug. 25,2010 Precaution Modified the description.
4.1.2 Modified the description and Figure 4.1.1.
Appendices Added Appendix O and modified Appendix J and N.
3.1 Oct. 2, 2017 --- Republished under spin-off company

 248 

Вам также может понравиться